SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006 Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
Transcript
SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006
Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike. Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable. The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition. As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
Acknowledgement
Our deepest appreciation to the following for their invaluable input :
Subject Specialists
Educational Technology Division, MOE Curriculum Planning & Development Division, MOE
MOE also sincerely thanks all parties who have contributed and
assisted in one way or another in the production of this new edition of The School Design Handbook.
USER’S REFERENCE
Volume No.
Chapter Name
Entire Page No.
Chapter No.
Content
Key Point
Revision Series No. / Date
Section Name Section No.
Item No.
Sub-Item No.
REV-02/MAY 05
SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006
Vol. 1
Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike. Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable. The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition. As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
REV 00 - FEB 06
School Design Handbook
Vol. 1 > GENERAL <
CONTENTS
1 School Design Philosophy
2 FlexSI Framework and Guideline 2.1 Overview 2.2 Design Concepts 2.3 The FlexSI Framework 2.4 FlexSI Design Provisions
3 Design Considerations 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Site Planning 3.3 Safety & Security / Emergency Planning 3.4 Vision Care
4 Appendices 4.1 Possible Classroom Configurations 4.2 Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages 4.3 External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces 4.4 Illustration of FAVE Space 4.5 School White Area (SWA) 4.6 Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for
School White Area
4.7 Primary School Facilities Table 4.8 Secondary School Facilities Table 4.9 Space Norms Master Revision List Index
1 School Design Philosophy
REV-00 / FEB 06
SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
1.1-1
VOL.
1
THE SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
1.0 The School Design Philosophy embodies the important principles to be addressed in school design and development. The objective is:
• To develop the school into a physical environment that is conducive to learning and play, one that provides stimuli for the child’s mental and physical growth, and one that serves as the platform for the child to aspire towards his goal.
1.1 The objective can be translated in the form of efficient provisions or in the form of interesting design. In whatever form, the objective should foster in the designer the need to:
• Know the User
• Examine the Function
• Encourage Flexibility
• Ensure Maintainability
• Respond to the Climate
• Understand the Site
2.0 The User
2.1 Understanding the profile and needs of the user, with respect to the following, is important in any building design. The user is defined by the following terms:
• Age group – primary, secondary or junior college students
• Gender – all-girls, all-boys or co-educational
• History – as a school, whether it has an established past or an identity
• Specialty – whether the school has niche areas or offers special programmes in art, music, life sciences etc
• Population – small capacity, big capacity, single or double-session
• Disability needs – full handicapped, basic handicapped, visual handicapped etc.
2.2 While the Age Group and Population will affect the scale of the building components, the other four factors may contribute towards architectural language and building image. The other factors also help to determine other special provisions required by the school.
REV-00 / FEB 06
1.1-2
VOL.
1 SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
3.0 Function
3.1 One aspect of function that school designs ought to achieve is spatial efficiency. Spaces must be planned with clearly assigned functions. The operations within the room and the need for particular operations must be addressed and well-catered for.
3.2 The school ought to also be efficient in its use of resources such as water and energy. Double-volume air conditioning of facilities should be avoided. Corridors and walkways ought to be sufficiently daylit to minimize dependence on artificial lighting. Lux levels provided are to be suitable for rooms of different usages.
Excessive water features, like fountains, are discouraged, in view of the need to conserve water and electricity consumption.
3.3 User safety and comfort is another essential component of functional design. User comfort encompasses factors such as general acoustic treatment, vision care and good ventilation, while user safety includes easy supervision, easy movement, good ergonomics and careful detailing.
3.4 Another crucial function of school design is to provide stimulus for the child’s creative development and encourage his appreciation of nature and the outdoors.
4.0 Flexibility
4.1 In designing the learning environment, there must be a conscious effort by architects to keep up with the dynamic changes in teaching pedagogy. Flexibility would prepare the school organization to adjust to new conditions and demands.
4.2 It has been widely acknowledged that one important consideration to addressing such dynamics is through employing flexibility in design.
4.3 Some ways to achieve flexibility would be to ensure sufficient space and to demarcate appropriate plots for expansion; to cater for multi-purpose and multi-size usage of rooms and to encourage sharing of facilities and integrated learning.
REV-00 / FEB 06
SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
1.1-3
VOL.
1
5.0 Maintainability
5.1 It is necessary to ensure durability and hardiness of areas that are prone to weathering, wear and tear and vandalism. This aspect of maintainability should be captured in the technical specifications and drawings for all types of works, such as roofing, metal and ironmongery, carpentry or sanitary fittings, among others.
5.2 It is also critical to ensure that the design and assembly of all building and spatial components cater for easy access for maintenance, cleaning, repair and replacement. This would include discouraging the extensive use of certain materials, e.g. glass; or discouraging certain building design, e.g. curved roofs, curved structures; and avoiding certain building elements, e.g. roof gutters which can cause ponding and lead to mosquito breeding.
5.3 The cost effectiveness of the design component, as seen from its life period, also needs to be considered.
6.0 The Climate
6.1 It is important for architects designing schools to consider Singapore’s tropical climate, especially since 85% of the schools’ built-up areas are naturally ventilated.
6.2 Some of the ways to address the heat and humidity of the tropical climate include:
• To orientate the front elevation of the buildings in the North-South direction to minimize direct solar light and heat transmission
• To provide effective roof overhangs to function as sunshading devices
• To introduce more balconies, single loaded corridors • To ensure generous fenestration or openings on walls for good
cross ventilation • Use of glare-proof materials in external areas • Use of moisture-resistant materials in areas that are exposed to
the weather
REV-00 / FEB 06
1.1-4
VOL.
1 SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
7.0 The Site
The site bears topographical features (land form and levels) and a physical boundary (shape, orientation, frontage). The site also has critical relationship with its neighbours (surrounding buildings, traffic conditions and other users). These serve as pointers that can be used to establish the following:
7.1 Zoning within the site
• whether the buildings grouped together have compatible uses
• where the quieter facilities should be located compared with the surrounding
• where the noisier activities should be housed
7.2 How the buildings should be laid out in terms of massing and height
• whether the arrangement obstructs the neighbouring building
• whether it blends in with the general surrounding
• whether it affects areas reserved for future expansion
7.3 The appropriate location of green spaces and covered spaces
7.4 The orientation of the building blocks in relation to the climate
8.0 Conclusion
The encapsulation of all the above as a set of design philosophy serves to guide all parties in the process of planning, detailing, choice of architectural style and image for the school building. This is to ensure that our schools continue to have adequate facilities to meet educational needs in the best possible way.
2 FlexSI Framework and Guideline
2.1
Overview
2.2 Design Concepts
2.3
The FlexSI Framework
2.4 FlexSI Design Provisions
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.1-1 OVERVIEW
1.0 Overview of the Flexible School Infrastructure (FLEXSI)
1.1 The FlexSI Concept
The Flexible School Infrastructure (FlexSI) was conceptualised to allow our school leaders more autonomy on the design of their schools, and to create flexible learning spaces and facilities that are sufficiently adaptable in order to support new pedagogies that will better engage our students in learning.
1.2 Objective
The new framework will allow primary and secondary schools to design their building infrastructure so that it is sufficiently flexible to adapt to varying classroom capacities, multiple functionalities and cater for future expansions as schools embark on new developments in pedagogy.
1.3 Design Concepts for Functional Flexibility The FlexSI framework proposes for school infrastructure to be designed to
achieve the following:
a) Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes / Dimensions
b) Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages
c) Design of External Areas as Learning Spaces
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.2-1 DESIGN CONCEPTS
2.0 Design Concepts
2.1 Some schools may decide that they need smaller and/or larger classrooms so they can employ different pedagogical approaches, or, so that they can engage students in different-sized group activities. With modular flexibility, schools can choose to vary the size of a classroom in modules of 45 m2 instead of the standard 90 m2. When the flexibility is not needed, schools can revert to the classrooms’ standard size and capacity.
2.2 Schools can also opt for differing levels of flexibility in the classrooms through the choice of the movable walls or partitions:
a) For day-to-day flexibility, a school may decide to design some of its classrooms to have foldable walls which can be opened to form a big lecture room to enable larger lecture style teaching for certain subjects/classes; or to partition a standard classroom into smaller rooms to cater to smaller groups of students with different learning abilities. However, there will be some trade-offs in installing foldable walls for this flexibility (compared with the traditional brick wall classrooms) in terms of cost, durability and noise insulation.
b) Another possibility is to use mobile partition screens within the classroom space. The screens can be moved around to form enclosures for small group discussions, or to isolate students who need to take private tests; or for independent learning.
c) For medium term (e.g. year-to-year) flexibility, schools can make use of dry wall partitions (gypsum board) instead of solid walls. When the need arises, these partitions can be removed without too much difficulty and allow the classroom spaces to be quickly reconfigured. See Appendix 1 for examples of some flexible classroom configurations.
Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes
Day to day flexibility using
movable partitions
Medium term flexibility using dry
wall partitions
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.2-2 DESIGN CONCEPTS
2.3 Under FlexSI, certain school facilities can be used for multiple purposes other than its intended function. Some schools currently make use of special teaching areas or rooms which are relatively less utilized to make them adaptable for alternative or multiple usages.
Facilities with
Adaptable Multiple Usages
2.4 Schools wanting to use a facility for multiple functions can consider the use of flexible mechanisms with features such as folding, sliding, tilting and rotating to enhance the facility’s flexibility in space, lighting, display and storage capabilities. Furniture and equipment that can be stacked, modified or wheeled can also be incorporated so that the room can be used for multiple functions such as training, projects, quizzes and competitions. One possibility is to have mobile canteen tables so that they can be folded and wheeled away, making the canteen space available for group or other activities. See Appendix 2 for examples.
2.5
Flexible Mechanisms
Detachable “plug and play” components such as internet ready IT equipment supplemented by acoustic paneling can also be brought in to enhance infrastructural flexibility for adaptable usage. For instance, the Music Room or AV Room could be designed so that it could be converted into a recording studio when the need arises for the school to produce AV recordings. Alternatively, the Music and AV Rooms could be located next to each other with a flexible partition between them, to enable both the areas to be combined into a larger area for activities such as dance or drama practices.
Furniture & Equipment (F&E)
2.6 The effective mode of learning differs from child to child. Facilities or spaces can be configured to meet the needs of the relevant modes, whether interactive, experiential, independent or hands-on learning. Spaces outside classrooms can especially be exploited as potential learning spaces. For e.g. outdoor gardens, classroom corridors and foyers can be designed to integrate teaching and learning functions. Such spaces generate exciting and varied physical experiences to ignite the students’ learning passions. See Appendix 3 for examples.
Designing External Areas as Learning
Spaces
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.3-1 The FlexSI FRAMEWORK
3.0 The FlexSI Framework
3.1 The FlexSI framework is represented diagrammatically as follows:-
Table 1:
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.3-2 The FlexSI FRAMEWORK
The FlexSI framework is translated into the following Design Guideline. The guideline lays down the guiding principles, caps and funding, roles and responsibilities and stipulates the major infrastructural provisions for schools.
3.2
In deciding on the design for FlexSI, schools should be guided by the following principles:
3.3
Guiding Principles
a) Spirit of Learning – the purpose is to promote learning
b) Safety - user safety must not be compromised at all times
c) Sustainability - plan for sustainability and maintainability of the facilities over the longer term
d) Stewardship - exercise proper stewardship over the management of infrastructure resources to minimize wastages and maximize usage
3.4 Under the guideline, there are overall caps placed on the use of budget, the built-up area (both Nett Floor Area and Gross Floor Area) and the school’s design provisions as follows:
Caps on FlexSI
provisions
3.5 Schools that are undergoing PRIME can capitalize on the budget for upgrading to re-think their learning needs and build the school that can best support their vision for learning.
Caps on Funding
The remaining schools which have already undergone PRIME and/or will not be undergoing PRIME will be able to leverage on the FlexSI Fund. If an Aided school is selected as a FlexSI Pilot School, it will be provided 95% of the amount.
3.6
3.7 Independent Schools currently have full flexibility in deciding on their facilities, and may already be provided with a wide range of facilities including lecture theatres and tutorial rooms. Hence, the FlexSI framework will only serve as a guide to Independent Schools, and provide them with more ideas on how they can make their infrastructure more flexible. No extra funding will be provided.
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.3-3 The FlexSI FRAMEWORK
3.8 In terms of areas, caps are placed on the total Nett Floor Area (NFA) per school. In primary and secondary schools, the total NFAs not to be exceeded are 8878 m2 and 11682.5 m2 respectively.
3.9 Within the given NFA, limits are set on grouped areas such as the School White Area (SWA) and FAVE space. Proposals for SWA shall not exceed 15% of the total NFA while proposals for FAVE space shall be within 890 m2 for primary school, and 1110 m2 for secondary school (taken from 10% of the standard circulation area).
3.10 IT proposals, e.g. requests for additional IT points and equipment, are to be catered for outside of the FlexSI design package as these are already made available under the existing IT grant.
3.11 FlexSI proposals that would result in significant recurrent costs are to be carefully considered and schools have to ensure their sustainability within their existing recurrent votes. E.g. the provision of air-conditioning to facilities to make them possible for multiple usages would incur substantial running costs.
3.12 Designs under the FlexSI concept must not be ostentatious and any aesthetic embellishments to the intended proposal must be excluded.
3.13 Containers or any other forms of temporary structures are not allowed to be used in the implementation of FlexSI.
Caps on Areas
Caps on Other Provisions
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.3-4 The FlexSI FRAMEWORK
3.14 The FlexSI guideline seeks to bring the relevant parties into design collaboration at the beginning stages of planning a new school so the inputs can be captured and taken into the design process. The school leaders, the design consultant and the Ministry’s representative each have a part to play in contributing to the ideation process. For schools, it is important to have representation from the different subject specialisation and user levels. Inputs from the various stakeholders of the school can bring added value to the process.
Roles
Schools will be engaged in the relevant thinking processes leading to the formulation of the Needs Identification with the help of the design consultant. During the engagement sessions, schools should freely express their needs and visions in terms of the pedagogical approaches, operational needs, educational strategies and finally, their perceived implications on the physical infrastructure. The consultant will consolidate these needs, including considerations like the school’s profile, identity and culture, to arrive at the Schedule of Accommodation and the proposed school design.
3.9 Responsibilities
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.4-1 FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS
4.0 FlexSI Design Provisions
The design provisions details the various facilities to be provided under FlexSI and what the school can decide on in the design of their schools. It consists of 4 main groups as listed below:
a) Group 1 - Essential Area
b) Group 2 - School White Area (SWA)
c) Group 3 - “FAVE” Space (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile)
d) Group 4 - Others
4.1 The Essential Area lists the basic essential facilities that the school must have to fulfil its basic instructional capabilities. The facilities are provided to address basic teaching and learning pedagogical requirements. It places minimum limits on the size and number of units of each facility.
Essential Area (Group 1)
4.2 The Essential Area is grouped into 2 sub categories, namely the Fixed Specifications and the Flexible Specifications:
a) Fixed Specification consists of provisions which are “non-negotiable” i.e. must be finished according to the minimum specifications provided e.g. the administrative facilities such as the general office, staff rooms and some rooms for the specialised subjects.
Fixed Specification
b) Flexible Specification consists of areas which the school has the flexibility in deciding on number, configuration or size. This allows a school greater flexibility in mixing and matching the different learning spaces. Note that the school must still conform to the minimum number, type, modular size and interior provisions of the facility e.g. the classrooms and ancillary areas such as the Hall, Canteen and Library.
Flexible Specification
REV-00 / FEB 06
FLEXSI
VOL.
1 2.4-2 FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS
4.3 School White Area
(Group 2)
The School White Area is an existing concept which gives the school autonomy to design or modify certain areas within the school. The school can choose to convert those areas designated as SWA (about 15% of the total nett floor area) into new facilities to cater to the school’s special programmes and niche areas. It can change the existing function, area, finishes and internal provision of the facilities to create new facilities.
4.4 Under FlexSI, the SWA concept, funding and approval authority will remain unchanged. Please refer to the tables on School White Area Component in Appendix 5 and Appendix 6 for the details and recommendations on SWA facilities and provisions.
The “FAVE” concept makes use of “excess” areas that can be aggregated to become useful spaces, and which can remain flexible and available for future expansion needs that the school might not yet envisage. FAVE Spaces can be identified from the school’s circulation areas.
FAVE Space (Group 3)
4.5
4.6 There is no set limit on the type of spaces that can be annexed for FAVE area usage so long as the space fits the design objective of the selected function. Meanwhile, the space can be used as informal learning areas cum circulation space. Under this concept, we estimate that up to a maximum of 10% of the total circulation/service areas may become FAVE space. An illustration of FAVE space is found in Appendix 4.
The “Others” category provide for mainly external works such as the play courts, field and parade square. These facilities have to be provided as specified. If modifications to these facilities are required, schools can submit the proposals to the relevant specialist in MOE for consideration.
Others (Group 4)
4.7
4.8 The Facilities Tables for Primary Schools and Secondary Schools sum up the infrastructural provision to be provided under FlexSI in terms of facility type, number of units, and unit area. These can be found in Appendix 7 and Appendix 8 respectively.
Facilities Tables for Primary and
Secondary Schools
3 Design Considerations
3.1
Introduction
3.2 Site Planning
3.3
Safety & Security / Emergency Planning
3.4 Vision Care
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS INTRODUCTION3.1-1
1.0 Introduction
1.1 This section serves to highlight the important considerations to be followed in school design. They include:
• Site Planning
• Safety & Security / Emergency Planning
• Vision Care
1.2 During the design process, there would be other considerations which schools could review and which consultants could render their expertise on. These include:
• Ergonomic design
• Maintainability
• Weather protection
1.3 These considerations apply to the design of the physical and spatial layout, roof, facade, building elements, finishes, internal provisions and fitment and furniture.
School Design Criteria
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
SITE PLANNING3.2-1
VOL.
1
2.0 Introduction
2.1 In every building design, the surrounding environment has significant impact on the quality of school facilities provided. There are many factors that can favourably or adversely influence the micro environment of the school.
2.2 Special design features in the building may be able to reduce, if not eliminate, the unfavourable effects. Site suitability is therefore an important aspect to be addressed at the onset of school development.
2.3 In order to achieve quality design, consideration must be given to the planning criteria outlined by the following site factors:
Site Area
Site Configuration and Terrain
Site Orientation
Setback Requirements
Zoning and Facilities Layout
2.4 The following describes the afore-mentioned site factors. The elaboration in terms of particular dimensions and technical pointers can be referred to in Vol. 4 - Chapter 1 (Architectural) of the School Design Handbook.
2.5 Site Area
At the inception of design, the area of the site has to be carefully examined by the architect in terms of feasibility for school development. The site area should be fairly level without excessive embankment and be free from drainage, sewerage or road reserve and service lines. Where site encumbrances are inevitable but within acceptable limits, a slightly bigger site area should be allowed for.
2.6 Site Configuration
Sites of irregular shapes are not ideal for effective utilization of land. They often result in pockets of unusable land. In land scarce Singapore, it is necessary to optimise the usage of land as much as possible.
Site factors to be considered
Site area to be free from encumbrances
Site to be regular in shape and well
optimised
REV-00 / FEB 06
SITE PLANNING
VOL.
1 3.2-2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
2.7 Site Orientation
The site configuration with respect to its orientation is important. A site with good orientation enables the buildings, particularly the classroom block(s), to be located in the correct orientation, i.e. with the longer facade facing the North-South direction. This is to minimise the penetration of sunlight and thus solar heat into the building. Deviations from the desired orientation should be addressed in the building design.
Minimise the
penetration of sunlight
2.8 Setback & Spacing Requirements
When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances from the site boundary and clearances between blocks have to be observed. This is to provide the school with buffers against noise and distractions (from adjacent traffic or from neighbouring facilities). As the school building is largely naturally-ventilated, these setbacks help to create good cross ventilation within the site.
2.9 Zoning & Facilities Layout
The placement of certain types of facilities in relation to other types and the proximity between them usually take into account the functions and operational requirements of those facilities. They affect the spatial flow within the school and influence the conduct of the activities. For e.g. the Canteen placed next to the Parade Square of Field enables the smooth spillover of mass activity between facilities, minimizing bottle-neck situations and providing a safe and more comfortable accommodation for the students.
Facilities Layout to accommodate
smooth operations and mass activity
Schools have areas that need to be secured and accesses to certain facilities need to be restricted. These are largely dictated by the facilities layout plan within the school. Other considerations on zoning include emergency planning.
Zoning to achieve safety and security
REV 00 / FEB 06
SAFETY & SECURITY
3.3-1
VOL.
1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.0 Safety & Security
3.1 Every school must provide a safe environment for its students, staff and property. Safety or the physical well-being of staff and students must be prioritized over other issues in the design of the building spaces, elements and finishes, in fitment and furniture, as well as building services.
3.2 The following highlight the safety pointers for Consultants to note, in terms of architectural, engineering and emergency planning provisions in a school.
3.3 The design of spaces within the building must take into account the size of the student population and the possibility of their mass movement. When students move in masses, wider corridors and even level flooring are to be provided. Where differing levels occur between spaces on the same floor, ramps are preferred.
3.4 It is important to note the profile of students in terms of their physical attributes, tendencies and the kinds of activity they normally engage in so as to provide the appropriate scale and design for all areas of building including furniture and fitment.
3.5 The implications of wet weather climate on student safety need to be addressed as our school buildings are largely open to the elements and are mostly naturally-ventilated.
3.6 Traffic, both vehicular and pedestrian, must be given due consideration and properly organized to ensure student safety at all times.
3.7 Care and precautionary steps need to be exercised in the installations of various building components such as ceilings, M & E services, weather protection devices, so that they do not pose as safety hazards to the students and staff.
3.8 As schools house a large quantity of assets, including IT equipment and confidential materials, they need to be well-secured within the right places and by the appropriate means.
Mass Accommodation
Student Profile
Climatic implications
Pedestrian and vehicular traffic
Installations of building
components
Security provisions
REV 00 / FEB 06
SAFETY & SECURITY
3.3-2
VOL.
1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3.9 Certain facilities and areas within the school are out of bounds to students and unauthorized staff. Access to these facilities need to be strictly controlled by use of secure locking mechanisms, key systems or security alarm systems.
3.10 Thermal comfort and Environmental Health are extended areas of safety that affect the well-being of students and staff. Spaces and facilities ought to be designed to ensure good cross ventilation and acceptable air qualities. Requirements relating to good hygiene need to be given due consideration at food preparation areas, refreshment areas and toilets within the school.
3.11 In time of emergency, the school must be well–prepared to direct and guide its students and staff to areas of safety or to accommodate them in protected facilities within the school. Holding areas must be identified and equipped with Public Address (PA) Systems.
3.12 The particular specifications and technical details on all the above requirements can be referred to in Chapters 1 & 2 of Vol.4.
Controlled Accesses
Thermal Comfort and
Environmental Health
Emergency Planning
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
VISION CARE3.4-1
VOL.
1
4.0 Vision Care
4.1 Vision care is an important design consideration in the planning of every facility. Schools can take the effort to promote good eye care habits among students while ensuring the school environment is well-catered for the care of its students’ vision.
4.2 From the technical viewpoint, the desired vision care objective is to provide for a comfortable level of lighting for the various purposes that may be required during teaching and learning. At the same time, it is to moderate the intensity of direct light coming from light sources and to minimize the glare that may be reflected off the working surfaces.
4.3 Facilities should hence be designed to take into account the full range of lighting needs of the activities conducted within them. The environmental impact of light on the facility, e.g. the amount of daylight, the solar orientation and the design of sunshades, as well as the vision care implications on these activities, must also be evaluated in order to achieve the objectives.
4.4 There are some possible technical pointers that could affect the vision care requirement of school facilities. These include:
Layout of facility in relation to the solar orientation
Number and size of window openings
Arrangement of students’ seats and work tables in
relation to source of light and teaching surfaces e.g. whiteboard, projection screen
Placement of whiteboard / projection screen in
relation to the source of light
Students’ viewing angles to the teaching surfaces
Type of material for whiteboard surface
Size of text used on whiteboard and projection screen
Type and number of lightings provided
Choice of room colour
Objective of Vision Care in
Facility Planning
Implications on Vision Care
REV-00 / FEB 06
VISION CAREDESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 3.4-2
VOL.
1
4.5 The guidelines on how to address vision care in facility design can be referred to in Vol. 4, Chapters 1 & 2 of the School Design Handbook. Some of them are highlighted below:
4.6 Non-air-conditioned rooms shall be orientated with their windows facing the North-South direction. This is to ensure that the whiteboard receives minimum glare from the incoming sunlight.
4.7 Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the exterior.
4.8 The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall not have windows or openings that would allow light to infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface.
Guidelines on Vision Care
North-South Orientation
Minimize Glare on Whiteboard
surface
4 Appendices
4.1
Possible Classroom Configurations
4.2 Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages
4.3
External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces
4.4 Illustration of FAVE Space
4.5
School White Area (SWA)
4.6 Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for School White Area
4.7
Primary School Facilities Table
4.8 Secondary School Facilities Table
4.9
Space Norms
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICESVOL.
1 CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS4.1-1
APPENDIX 1. EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS
1 Day to Day (Immediate) Flexibility
Full height operable partitions can be used to reconfigure a space within a short time span of perhaps 10 to 15 minutes. Additionally, mobile furniture and equipment (F & E) which can be easily shifted within a facility as well as from room to room can be used. Thus both teachers and students will be able to quickly configure a space to suit their requirements.
2 Medium Term Flexibility
Compared to solid walls, dry wall partitions will take a shorter time to remove (about 3 days) when a reconfiguration of space is required.
3 Sample Configuration 1:
3.1 In this illustration, both degrees of flexibility have been incorporated: The sliding folding partition allows 2 classrooms to be combined into 1 large classroom. The enlarged classroom space can be used for lecture-style teaching on a day-to-day need basis, simply by opening the sliding folding partition in between.
On the other hand, for the purpose of medium term flexibility, for e.g. when physical niches are needed to accommodate resource corners within the classroom, the drywall partition in between can be easily removed and reconfigured.
Dry wall partition reconfigured into resource areas
Sliding Foldi
“Lecture” style teaching can be conducted when partitio
ng Partition
n is opened
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICESVOL.
1 CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS4.1-2
4 Sample Configuration 2:
4.1 In this illustration, we can see that the enlarged classroom allows the teacher to explore different pedagogical styles. The teacher in this case, is formally teaching a set of students while at the same time monitoring another set of students seated in small discussion groups. The partially closed sliding folding partition and the mobile screen aid to minimize visual distractions for students involved in the small group discussions.
Small Groudiscussion
p
Mobile partition acts as visual
screen
“Instructional” style teaching being conducted
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICESVOL.
1 FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE ADAPTABLE USAGES4.2-1
APPENDIX 2. EXAMPLES OF FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE ADAPTABLE USAGES
The photo on the left shows an example of an Indoor Sports Hall with retractable tiered seating neatly flushed against the wall when seating is not required, thus clearing the space for other activities. However, as shown in the photo on the right, when there is need for seating of an audience, the tiered seating is pulled out. This flexibility allows the Hall to be utilized for multiple functions.
A school can opt to divide Canteen space into several Canteen areas distributed throughout the school. For example, the school can have a smaller Canteen and another café-style eating area near the library. Alternatively, the school can transform some of its smaller yet open common spaces into the snack bars. These satellite eating spaces provide venues for student interaction and can be used as learning areas outside their classrooms. When required for other purposes, the chairs and tables can be moved aside.
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICESVOL.
1 EXTERNAL AREAS AS LEARNING SPACES 4.3-1
APPENDIX 3. EXAMPLES OF EXTERNAL AREAS DESIGNED AS LEARNING SPACES
This is an example of an outdoor amphitheatre. It can be used for performing arts events as well as for informal group briefings.
The above picture shows a corridor outside the Mother Tongue Language Room which has been modified into a display gallery showcasing the Malay Culture. The corridor can be used for other forms of display and become a highly interactive space for learning.
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICESVOL.
1 FAVE AREAS 4.4-1
APPENDIX 4. ILLUSTRATION OF “FAVE” (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile) SPACE
Before Expansion
Room Space
Room Space
Corridor
Staircase Study Corner“FAVE” space
After Expansion
Corridor
Staircase Room Space enlarged
Study Corner “optimized”
As part of the school design, FAVE space can be carved out of the circulation areas to serve as informal learning spaces. When a room needs to be enlarged for a larger class size, for example, the FAVE space can then be aggregated together with the existing space within the room.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
1 SCHOOL WHITE AREA APPENDICES
4.5-1
APPENDIX 5: OVERVIEW
1.1 ‘School White Area’ (SWA) is a planning concept that allows schools undergoing development greater flexibility in deciding the facilities requirement for the schools’ special programmes and niche areas.
1.2 The more common SWA facilities requested by schools are for various functions including Multi-purpose use, Sports, Performing Arts, Archive and Heritage display, Dance and Music. On the other hand, the commonly replaced “basic” facilities include the CCA rooms and the Mother Tongue Language rooms. A complete list is shown in Appendices 6.
1.3 Under the SWA concept, 15% to 20% of the standard school nett floor area can be utilised to change the existing standard facilities, or to create new ones that are not found within schools’ standard provision. The funds for these facilities would be arranged by the replacement cost method.
1.4 The school submitting proposals for their change request would have to obtain approval through MOE.
1.5 Finishes and interior provisions for SWA facilities could be proposed by the school, for the architect’s evaluation and MOE’s approval. This is to encourage creativity and innovation. Schools can also refer to a list of recommended finishing for the different facilities as shown in Appendix 6.
1.6 The overall costs of both ‘basic’ areas and SWA must be within the project budget. If there is cost overrun due to new facilities under the SWA, schools will be asked to fund the extra costs.
1.7 Schools’ proposal for SWA request must be:
• in line with educational needs, whether they pertain to teaching or ancillary facilities that support the schools’ ability-driven programmes and niches.
• within the total nett floor area (NFA) of standard facilities and project cost
• within the approved caps on maintenance and running costs for standard facilities
• put to use for a minimum period of 5 years in order to give the proposal time to take effect
Commonly requested facilities
Approval process
Recommended finishes
Planning criteria for SWA
REV-00 / FEB 06
SCHOOL WHITE AREA APPENDICES
4.5-2
VOL.
1
1.8 The following facilities are not allowed:
• Running tracks and swimming pools - these would require more land area and are costly to build and maintain
• Covered car-parks
• Air-conditioning of classrooms
• Facilities which are ostentatious or opulent in nature
• Increase in administrative and personnel areas that are in contradiction to Inter-Ministry guidelines
1.9 For the external areas, the current provision of a Field, a Basketball Court and Netball cum Volleyball Court must be retained, as advised by the Educational Programmes Division.
Facilities that are not allowed
REV-00 / FEB 06
RECOMMENDED SWA FACILITIES APPENDICES
4.6-1
VOL.
1
APPENDIX 6A. SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN PRIMARY SCHOOL
Basic Facilities White Area Facilities Facility Unit
(No) Total Area
(m2) Unit (No)
Total Area (m2)
1 Mother Tongue Language Room
0 0 3 135
2 Mathematics Room 0 0 1 90
3 Art & Crafts Room 1 90 1 90
4 Audio Visual Room (A/C) 0 0 2 180
5 Music Room (A/C) 1 90 1 90
6 Science Room 1 90 1 90
7 IT Learning Resource Room (A/C)
0 0 1 90
8 Meeting Room (A/C) 0 0 1 65
9 Counselling Room 0 0 1 24
10 Furniture Store 0 0 1 65
11 Games Equipment Store 0 0 1 65
12 CCA Room 0 0 3 195
13 Pastoral Care Room 0 0 1 40
14 Health & Fitness Room 0 0 1 65
REV-00 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
4.6-2
VOL.
1 RECOMMENDED SWA FACILITIES
APPENDIX 6B. SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOL
Basic Facilities White Area Facilities
Facility Unit (No)
Total Area (m2)
Unit (No)
Total Area (m2)
1 Mother Tongue Language Room
0 0 3 135
2 Humanities Room 0 0 1 90
3 Humanities Workroom 0 0 1 22.5
4 Commerce Room 0 0 1 135
5 Art & Crafts Room 1 135 1 135
6 Project Room 0 0 1 45
7 Casting Room 0 0 1 22.5
8 Audio Visual Room (A/C) 0 0 1 135
9 AV Store 0 0 1 45
10 IT Learning Resource Room (A/C)
1 90 2 180
11 Needlework Room 0 0 1 115
12 Design Room 0 0 1 200
13 Design Room Store 0 0 1 20
14 Prefects’ Room 0 0 1 25
15 Counselling Room 0 0 1 24
16 Career Guidance Room 0 0 1 40
17 Meeting Room (A/C) 0 0 1 65
18 Furniture Store 0 0 1 72
19 Games Equipment Store 0 0 1 72
20 CCA Room 0 0 4 96
21 Health & Fitness Room 0 0 1 72
22 NCC/NPCC Room 0 0 2 48
23 Rifle Range 0 0 1 208
24 Armoury 0 0 1 20
Total Nett Floor Area 225 2022
REV-00 / FEB 06
RECOMMENDED FINISHES FOR SWA FACILITIESVOL.
1 4.6-3 APPENDICES
APPENDIX 6C. RECOMMENDED FINISHING FOR SWA FACILITIES
ITEM FACILITY/ROOM DESCRIPTION OF USAGE FLOOR WALL/ PARTITION CEILING
MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD
PIN-UP BOARD
PROJECTION SCREEN
MASTERKEY GROUPINGS
SECURITY OTHERS
1 Art Gallery To display students' art works and art pieces Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Emulsion paint Emulsion paint Nil Nil Nil Nil High Nil
2 Multi-Purpose Room For group function, rehearsals, small performances etc. Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Acoustic Panels Suspended Ceiling
Yes Yes Yes Master key Medium Nil
3 Band Room For band, Chinese orchestra and dance practices Timber Strip Flooring Acoustic Panels Suspended Ceiling
Nil Yes Yes Master key High Nil
4 Dance Studio For practical and theory dance lessons Timber Sport Floor Full-height mirrored Wall on 3 sides and acoustic wall panels
Suspended Ceiling
Yes Yes Yes Master key Medium Nil
5 Music Room For practical and theory music lessons; shared between band and choir
Timber Strip Flooring Full-height mirrored Wall on 1 side and acoustic wall panels
7 Heritage Centre Display of school's heritage items Homogeneous Ceramic Tiles Emulsion paint Suspended Ceiling
Nil Nil Nil Master key High Nil
8 Career Resource Room
Stores informative charts, reference documents, software and communication tools on career development; for interviews, consultations on career resource
Must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
5 OFFICE STORE Min. 1 Min. 20
6 PRINTING ROOM (A/C) Min. 1 Min. 20
7 SICK BAY Min. 1 Min. 20
-Nil-
8 H.O.Ds’ OFFICE (A/C) Min. 1 103 To provide for 10 staff and workstation area of 8 m2 per HOD.
9 STAFF ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
502 To provide for 94 staff and workstation area of 4 m2 per staff.
10 STAFF LOUNGE (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 40
11 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 65 -Nil-
Can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 880
REV-02 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
VOL.
1 4.7-2
PRIMARY SCHOOL FACILITIES TABLE
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) – CON’T
FIXED SPECIFICATION FACILITY TYPE NO. OF
UNITS UNIT AREA
(m2) REMARKS
FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION
ANCILLARY
1 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 368 To provide Librarian Workroom and Instructional Area.
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL - STAGE AREA - SEATING AREA
1
1 1
1070
Min. 30 Min. 910
Hall’s seating area to provide capacity for maximum enrolment and staff. A full performance stage has to be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, the
Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage.
If the Stage and Seating areas total less than 1070 m2, the excess area can be recombined with other facilities e.g. AV Room to include the full performance stage.
3 CANTEEN Min. 1
Min. 700 Total Canteen areas to provide for maximum student enrolment per session over 2 recess periods.
School can decide on different canteen type but total minimum area must not be less than 700m2. Can explore provisions for multiple usages. Can be combined with “FAVE” areas.
4 BOOK SHOP Min. 1
Min. 12 Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
5 DENTAL CLINIC (A/C) 1 42
6 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM 1 10
-Nil-
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 2214
TOTAL ESSENTIAL AREA 7594
REV-02 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
VOL.
1 4.7-3
PRIMARY SCHOOLFACILITIES TABLE
SCHOOL WHITE AREA (GROUP 2) FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS
UNIT AREA (m2)
TOTAL AREA (m2)
REMARKS
GENERAL TEACHING
1 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM 3 45 135 This facility can be converted into other facilities.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2 MATHEMATICS ROOM 1 90
90
3 ART & CRAFTS ROOM / ART STORE 1 90 90 4 AUDIO VISUAL ROOM (A/C) 2 90 180
5 MUSIC ROOM (A/C) 1 90 90 These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.
6 SCIENCE ROOM 1 90 90
7 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) 1 90 90
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF AREAS
1 COUNSELLING ROOM 1 24 24
2 MEETING ROOM (A/C) 1 65 65 These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.
ANCILLARY
1 CCA ROOM 3 65 195
2 PASTORAL CARE ROOM 1 40 40
3 HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM 1 65 65
4 FURNITURE STORE 1 65 65
5 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE 1 65 65
These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the school’s niche areas.
TOTAL SCHOOL WHITE AREA 1284
TOTAL NFA * INCLUDING : 8878m2
ESSENTIAL AREA, SCHOOL WHITE AREA
* The total NFA of the school must not exceed 8878m2
REV-02 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
VOL.
1 4.7-4
PRIMARY SCHOOL FACILITIES TABLE
“FAVE” AREA (GROUP 3)
FIXED SPECIFICATION FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION TYPE OF SPACE
1
CIRCULATION SPACE Approximately 890m
2 SERVICES AREAS
2 (10%) of the school’s circulation space can be carved from.
To cater for future expansion of facilities while currently serving as informal learning spaces.
TOTAL “FAVE” AREA (M2) 890
OTHER AREA (GROUP 4) FIXED SPECIFICATION
NO. OF UNITS
DIMENSIONS (m) TOTAL AREA (m
REMARKS FACILITY TYPE 2)
1 STAFF & VISITORS CAR PARK LOTS 23 4.8 x 2.4 265
2 BUS LOTS 4 13.2 X 3.6 190
3 MOTORCYCLE LOTS 6 2.4 X 1.0 14.4
4 BASKETBALL COURT 1 32.0 X 19.0 608
5 NETBALL-CUM-VOLLEYBALL COURT 1 32.0 X 17.0 544
6 PLAYFIELD 1 80.0 x 40.0 3200
In general, these facilities have to be provided as stated. Schools will be required to justify all deviations.
7 PARADE SQUARE 1 40.0 x 30.0 1200
8 OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA 1 30.0 x 4.0 120
REV-02 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
VOL.
1 4.8-1
SECONDARY SCHOOLFACILITIES TABLE
APPENDIX 8.
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) FIXED SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS
UNIT AREA (m2)
REMARKS
FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION
GENERAL TEACHING
1 CLASSROOM Min. 34
Min. 45
To provide for maximum capacity of 1520 students per session. When required, built area must be able to revert to 38 units of 90m2.
School to decide on the number of units, size (in modular increments of 45 m2) and configuration, depending on its needs.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 3420
SPECIAL TEACHING 1 ART & CRAFTS ROOM Min.
1 Min. 135
2 ART STORE Min. 1
Min. 22.5
3 MUSIC ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 135
4 MUSIC STORE Min. 1
Min. 45
5 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 90
6 COMPUTER ROOM (A/C) Min. 4
Min. 135
7 SCIENCE LABORATORY Min. 6
Min. 144
8 LAB PREP ROOM / STORE Min. 3
Min. 50
9 KITCHEN Min. 2
Min. 125
10 KITCHEN PREP ROOM / STORE Min. 1
Min. 42
-Nil- Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 2273.5 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 1 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 1 1 Min. 360
2 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 2 1 Min. 240
3 WOOD MACHINE SHOP 1 Min. 124
4 MAIN STORE 1 Min. 40
5 TOOLS STORE 1 Min. 40
6 D & T STAFF ROOM (A/C) 1 24
-Nil-
7 D & T STUDIO (LS) 1 Min. 300 As required for schools offering lower secondary curriculum only.
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 828 (excluding D & T Studio (LS))
REV-02 / FEB 06
APPENDICES
VOL.
1 4.8-2
SECONDARY SCHOOL FACILITIES TABLE
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) – CON’T FIXED SPECIFICATION
Must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
5 OFFICE STORE Min. 1
Min. 20
6 PRINTING ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 20
7 SICK BAY Min. 1
Min. 20
-Nil-
8 H.O.Ds’ OFFICE (A/C) Min. 1
113 To provide for 11 staff and workstation area of 8 m2 per HOD.
9 STAFF ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
390 To provide for 73 staff and workstation area of 4 m2 per staff.
10 STAFF LOUNGE (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 40
11 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 65 -Nil-
Can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
(RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 778 ANCILLARY
1 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C) Min. 1
Min. 450 To provide Librarian Workroom and Instructional Area.
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL - STAGE AREA
1
1 - SEATING AREA 1
1177
Min. 30 Min. 990
Hall’s seating area to provide capacity for maximum enrolment and staff. A full performance stage has to be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, the Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage.
If the Stage and Seating areas total less than 1070 m2, the excess area can be recombined with other facilities e.g. AV Room to include the full performance stage.
3 CANTEEN Min. 1
Min. 700 Total Canteen areas to provide for maximum student enrolment per session over 2 recess periods.
School can decide on different canteen type but total minimum area must not be less than 700m2. Can explore provisions for multiple usages. Can be combined with “FAVE” areas.
4 BOOK SHOP Min. 1
Min. 12 -Nil-
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
5 DENTAL CLINIC (A/C) 1 42 To provide facility as required only. -Nil-
6 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM 1 10 -Nil- Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike. Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable. The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition. As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
School Design Handbook
Vol. 2 > PRIMARY SCHOOL <
CONTENTS Introduction
1 General teaching 1.1 Classroom 1.2 Learning Support Coordinator’s Room 1.3 Mother Tongue Language Room
2 Special Teaching 2.1 Mathematics Room 2.2 Art & Crafts Room 2.3 Audio Visual Room 2.4 Music Room & Store 2.5 Science Room 2.6 Computer Room 2.7 IT Learning Resource Room
4 Ancillary 4.1 Media Resource Library 4.2 Multi-Purpose Hall 4.3 Multi-Purpose Hall
(1. Control Room 2. Changing Room 3. Store)
4.4 Furniture Store 4.5 Canteen 4.6 Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room 4.7 Health & Fitness Room 4.8 Games Equipment Room 4.9 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room 4.10 Bookshop 4.11 Dental Clinic 4.12 Pastoral Care Room
5 Services & Circulation 5.1 Toilets 5.2 LAN Room 5.3 Central Server Room 5.4 FAVE Area
6 External Works 6.1 Carpark, Driveway & Porch 6.2 Field, Fence & Footbath 6.3 Play Courts & Parade Square 6.4 Outdoor Fitness Area 6.5 Gates & Signwall 6.6 Guard Post List of Abbreviations User’s Reference Master Revision List
REV 00/ FEB 06
Introduction
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction
1.1 The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the school’s facilities.1
2.0 Planning Parameters
2.1 The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario:
School operating on a 4:2 session model Having a max. enrolment of 1440 students (critical session)
2.2 In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated.
3.0 How to use this Volume
3.1 Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured.
3.2 The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility.
3.3 As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or other details due to the school’s specific programmes, Consultants are required to seek the school’s and MOE’s advice as to the relevancy of the information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it and the implications, if any, accordingly.
1 The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary School’s Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1 - Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).
1 General Teaching
1.1
Classroom
1.2 Learning Support Coordinator’s Room
1.3
Mother Tongue Language Room
REV-01 / FEB 06
GENERAL TEACHING
VOL
2 CLASSROOM1.1-1
.
NO. OF UNITS (per school) Min. 42 When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 42 (90 m2 each). AREA Min. module of 45 m2 per classroom When required, area must be able to revert to 90 m2 (42 units)
CAPACITY For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students
For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room
FUNCTION General Instruction Area
Other possible functions include – project work, multi-group activity, independent learning
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Quiet zone
Preferably near the Special Teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE Students’ seating to be min. 3m clear from whiteboard
Moveable wall partition if installed should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA.
State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind
SERVICES --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 1 – 3.4)
Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant
Window arrangement and other façade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds As required Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall
length Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Students’ Table 40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m Computer Table 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Storage Space for 40
students per session State Flag 1 no. to comply with specifications
(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Moveable Wall Partition
As required
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Security System As required Others Nil
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher) Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher)
4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted
1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply As required (for Primary Schools only) Others DB Closet as required
POSITION OF STATE FLAG/ MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD AT FRONT WALL
REV-01 / MAY 06
LEARNING SUPPORT COORDINATOR’S ROOM
VOL.
2
GENERAL TEACHING
1.2-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE NO. OF UNITS Min. 1 When required, units must be able to revert to 1 unit of 90m2 each
AREA Min. 45 m2 per module to include: 1. Teacher’s Corner 2. Interview Area 3. Listening Post 4. Library Corner 5. Group Instructional Area
When required, area must be able to revert to 1 unit of 90 m2
CAPACITY 1 Staff
10 Students
FUNCTION General Instruction Area Project work / Individual coaching / Independent learning
LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st Storey
Preferably near to Special Teaching areas Separated from Music Room and Canteen/ Hall
FITMENT/FURNITURE State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind
1.5m high partitions to be provided for specific area
SERVICES --
OTHERS When required, area must be able to revert to 1 x 90 m2 with consideration given to façade elements and proper distribution of mechanical and electrical services.
If moveable wall partition is installed, it should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds As Required Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m at each Specific Area Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Students’ Table 10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m Cabinets Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Storage Space for 10 students
State Flag 1 no. to comply with specifications (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Moveable Wall Partition
As Required
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Key alike per room Master Key Set C
(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System As required Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1 no. for TV)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted
1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply As required Others DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
LEARNING SUPPORT COORDINATOR’S ROOM
VOL.
2
GENERAL TEACHING
1.2-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Tables Area
3. Library Corner
4. Group Instructional Area
5. Listening Post
6. Interview Area
7. Low Cabinet for EP Resources & Student’s Storage
8. Low Cabinet/ Computer Workstation Area
9. Worktop with High Cabinet
10. LCD Projector
11. Min 1.5m High Partition
12. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
13. Pin-up Board
14. TV
15. Printer
REV-00 / FEB 06
MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM
VOL.
2
GENERAL TEACHING
1.3-1
NO. OF UNITS 3 nos.
AREA 45 m2 per unit
Total of 135 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
30 Students
FUNCTION Teaching of Mother Tongue Languages: Chinese, Tamil & Malay
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Centrally accessible from classrooms
Near Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS 2 rooms to be interconnected with sliding folding partition (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Sliding folding partition to be usable as Pin-up Board
between 2 Rooms Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Students’ Table 10 nos. of Mobile Table Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 5 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 5 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 3 nos. Ceiling Mounted
1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol.4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM
VOL.
2
GENERAL TEACHING 1.3-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 3 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOMS
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. LCD Projector
5. Sliding Folding Partition
2 Special Teaching
2.1
Mathematics Room
2.2 Art & Crafts Room
2.3
Audio Visual Room
2.4 Music Room & Store
2.5
Science Room
2.6 Computer Room
2.7
IT Learning Resource Room
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2
MATHEMATICS ROOMSPECIAL TEACHING 2.1-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 90 m2
Area to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION Repository for Mathematics materials and resources
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Should not be on 1st storey
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blackout Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of the rear wall length
Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable*
Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Students’ Table 14 nos. 1.6m/0.8 x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Computer Table 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2
MATHEMATICS ROOM SPECIAL TEACHING 2.1-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. Computer Tables
5. Pin-up Board
6. LCD Projector
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM2.2-1 SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM
AREA Min. 90 m2
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 1-2 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION Instructional Strategies Mostly activity-based learning strategies involving hands-on experience
Storage of Art Materials
Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Min. 1 no. Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/bulky projects and for drying pottery/ clay sculptures
FITMENT/FURNITURE Kiln is optional - Safety and ventilation requirements to be ensured where kiln is placed
Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish
Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items
All fitment located outside Art & Crafts Room must be weather-resistant
SERVICES Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Art Store to be provided and should have visual link with the Art and Crafts Rooms
Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a min. 2.5m shelter/ overhang to protect area from rain
Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from Art and Crafts Room Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide
between 2 Rooms Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain As required Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet
1 no. 1.2m high x appropriate rear wall length Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Students’ Table 40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m or
14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Computer Table 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sinks (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Supply Cabinet Folio Cabinet
Kiln 1 no. 8 cubic (Optional, to be confirmed) Others Soap Dispenser
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Security Grilles to Drying Terrace
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 1 no. Single Gang for LCD 1 no. Isolator for Kiln (where kiln is provided)
Lighting (Lux) 500 2 nos. 3m Long Track Lighting
Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol.4 – 2.3) Water Supply 2 nos. of Cold Water Supply for each Art Room Others DB Closet as required
Isolator to be provided for Exhaust Fans
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM2.2-2 SPECIAL TEACHING
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF ART & CRAFTS ROOMS 1 & 2 (90 M2 EACH) AND ART STORE (WITHOUT KILN)
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Tables Area
3. Large Format Table Area (14 nos. Trapezoidal Tables)
4. Computer Tables Area
5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
6. 2 nos. of double-sided Mobile Whiteboard
7. Pin-up Board
8. Low Cabinet with Sinks
9. Low Cabinet
10. Worktop with High Cabinets
11. Sliding Folding Acoustic Partition
12. LCD Projector
13. Space for Kiln
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF STORE (KILN IS OPTIONAL)
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM2.2-3 SPECIAL TEACHING
SAMPLE DIAGRAM OF SEATING AREA FOR STILL LIFE LESSONS
PHOTO OF ART & CRAFTS ROOM AS SEEN FROM REAR OF ROOM
PHOTO OF DRYING DECK
REV-00 / FEB 06
AUDIO VISUAL ROOMVOL.
2
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.3-1
NO. OF UNITS 2 nos.
AREA
90 m2
Total of 180 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION For screening of films, slides, OHP transparency filmstrips, television etc.
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Centrally located with respect to Classrooms and preferably near MRL
Should be on upper storeys
FITMENT / FURNITURE --
SERVICES Microphone points to be evenly distributed within room
OTHERS The 2 Audio Visual Rooms preferably to be adjacent to each other with sliding folding partition in between
Sliding folding partition to be acoustic type
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
Wall Acoustic Treatment (One Music Room to have 2.4m High Full Height Mirror on one side) Emulsion Paint (Music Store)
Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Music Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Music Store)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blackout Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. Magnetic with 1m Manuscript Lines Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Computer Table 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets Music Rack & Adjustable Rack Shelves (Store) Others 1 no. Piano 1 no. AV Table
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher (Music Room)
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel (Music Room) Solid Door (Music Store)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 5 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1 no. in Music Store)
Lighting (Lux) 500 300 (Music Store)
Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Music Store) Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (Music Room) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. TV
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 MUSIC ROOM & STORE2.4-2 SPECIAL TEACHING
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 2 MUSIC ROOMS (90 M2 EACH) & MUSIC STORE
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Computer Tables Area
3. AV Hardware Cabinet
4. Piano
5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
6. Full Height Mirror (in one music room only)
7. Music Rack with adjustable shelves
8. LCD Projector
9. TV
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 SCIENCE ROOM 2.5-1 SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA Min. 90 m2 per unit
If more than I unit is provided, 1 unit of 90 m2
to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 1 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION Science based subjects and hands-on experiments
Storage of teaching aids and lab materials
Preparation of class activities
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE Worktops to be finished with solid surfacing material with no-drip edge
Sink to be polypropylene and vitreous enamel
2 trolleys located in the store/Preparation Room
SERVICES
--
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Preparation Room should have visual link to the Science Room
Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Glazed ceramic tiles to min. 2.2m Height (except for
walls behind High Cabinet in Preparation Room) Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blackout Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic and 1.2m x 1.2m
Sliding Graph Board integrated with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. Worktable with sink Students’ Table 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Computer Table 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet (See Vol. 4- 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) Power Points 8 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no.
for printer) 3 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 1 – 2.3) Water Supply 3 nos. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Tap Others 1 no. TV
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 SCIENCE ROOM 2.5-2 SPECIAL TEACHING
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 SCIENCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Worktable with sink
2. Students’ Tables Area
3. Computer Tables Area
4. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
5. Low Cabinet with Sink
6. Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet
7. Low Cabinet
8. Refrigerator
9. LCD Projector
10. TV
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 COMPUTER ROOM 2.6-1 SPECIAL TEACHING
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY
NO. OF UNITS Min. 3 Nos.
AREA Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom) CAPACITY 1 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION Hands-on computer-based learning
Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with Computer Workroom
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES 1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table
1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teacher’s table
Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided
Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 – 1.3)
Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain As required Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom) Computer Table 21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up
Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1
no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom) 1 no. Single Gang for LCD
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Master Switch
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 COMPUTER ROOM 2.6-2 SPECIAL TEACHING
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Computer Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. LCD Projector
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
2
IT LEARNINGRESOURCE ROOM
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.7-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 90 m2
Area to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
42 Students
FUNCTION Hands-on Computer based Group Learning
Group Studies
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to Room
SERVICES 1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for 2 computer tables
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type
Max. viewing distance from projection screen to last row of students to be 12.5m
RECOMMENDED MINIMUM PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol 4 – 2.3)
Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length
Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable
Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m Computer Table 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others Nil
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher
& 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Master Switch
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2
IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.7-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Computer Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. LCD Projector
3 Administration
3.1
Principal’s Office
3.7 Meeting Room
3.2 Vice-Principal’s Office
3.8 Counselling Room
3.3
General Office
3.9 Staff Room
3.4
Office Store 3.10
Staff Lounge
3.5 Printing Room
3.11 Staff Resource Room
3.6
H.O.D’s Store 3.12
Sick Bay
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE /STAFF PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE
VOL.
2 3.1-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 20 m2
CAPACITY 1 Principal
5 Visitors
FUNCTION Principal’s work area
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance
Interconnected with Vice-Principal’s Office and General Office
Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and HODs’ Office
FITMENT/FURNITURE Built-in safe for Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal
Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe
Safe to be 850mm above FFL
SERVICES --
OTHERS School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
FITMENT/ FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Principal’s Tables 1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Cabinets 1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe
2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
Others 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
Others 1 no. Safe (See Critical Information)
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE /STAFF PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE
VOL
2 3.1-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT
LEGEND
1. Principal’s Work Area
2. Lounge Area (Sofa Set & Side Tables)
3. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe
4. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
5. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
6. Pin-up Board
7. Magnetic Whiteboard
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 20 M2 PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF
VICE-PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE3.2-1
VOL.
2 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12 M2 OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS 1 per VP
AREA
12 m2 per VP
CAPACITY 1 Staff , 2 Visitors
FUNCTION Vice-principal’s work area
LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st storey
Accessible through General Office
Interconnected with General Office
Near Principal’s Office and H.O.D’s Office
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Vice-Principal’s Table
1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m
Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
Others Nil
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is
from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Typist’s Table 5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m Cabinets 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards
3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Reception Counter
Others 1 no. Key Deposit Box 1 no. Keyboard 2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) 1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the
General Office 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)
1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for
Scanner & 1 no. for Printer) 3 nos. Single Gang (General Office) 2 nos. Twin Gang (AM) 1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fan Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)
Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel Lightning Warning System Console Photocopier DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF GENERAL OFFICE 3.3-2
VOL.
2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE
LEGEND
1. AM/OM/CSO Area
2. Typists’ Tables Area
3. Visitors’ Lounge
4. Reception Counter
5. High Cabinet
6. Photocopier
7. Printer/Scanner Area
8. 2-Doors Cupboards
9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
10. Magnetic Whiteboard
11. Pin-up Board
12. Fire Alarm Panel
13. PA System
14. Keyboard
15. Key Deposit Box
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE /STAFF OFFICE STORE
VOL.
2 3.4-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 STORE
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with General Office
Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Door to be min. 1.2m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 4 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine,
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m Others 10 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance
Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 12 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) Power Points 15 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table
18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang
1 no. Single Gang for LCD Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. LCD
1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
MEETING ROOM ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.7-2
VOL.
2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area
2. LCD Projector
3. Low Cabinet
4. Pin-up Board
5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
COUNSELLING ROOMADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.8-1
VOL.
2 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA
24 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 5 persons
FUNCTION Private area to counsel students and parents
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 2nd storey
Access from corridor
Easily accessible to staff and students
There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it
Counselling Room should be on the same level as Pastoral Care Room, preferably next to each other
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl Flooring Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet Others 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Door with Vision Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang
3 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Tape Recorder
2 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
COUNSELLING ROOM ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.8-2
VOL.
2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table)
3. Pouffes Area
4. Low Cabinet
5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
6. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF STAFF ROOM3.9-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 502 M2 STAFF ROOM
NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL) Min. 1
AREA 502 m2 comprising:
1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 <+/- 5%> each)
2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers
CAPACITY 94 Staff
FUNCTION Teaching staff office
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey
Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room
Near General Office, H.O.Ds’ Office and Office Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE Staff workstation to be system furniture
Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wall-mounted
SERVICES The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable
See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations
Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-in-Charge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools
School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Others 78 nos. Workstation for 36 + 6 Classrooms or
94 nos. Workstation for 42 Classrooms (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock
with Door Closer Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 98 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) Power Points 102 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa
2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door
Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser Others 1 no. Refrigerator
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
STAFF LOUNGE ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.10-2
VOL.
2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
LEGEND
1. Lounge Sofa Area
2. Journal Rack
3. Low Cabinet with Sink
4. Refrigerator
REV-00 / FEB 06
STAFF RESOURCE ROOMADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.11-1
VOL.
2 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 65 m2
CAPACITY 16 Staff
FUNCTION Repository for shared teaching materials
Preparation of teaching materials
Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably interconnected with Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink
Accessible from General Office for close supervision
Preferably interconnected with General Office
FITMENT /FURNITURE Cater for future air-conditioning
Backsplash to be provided for Sink
SERVICES Power point to be located at table area
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Tables 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet Others 2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed
Towel Rail and Mirror 1 no. Soap Dispenser
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing
Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 (Bedhead lights to be provided) Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. Others 1 no. Sink
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds (All Areas) Whiteboard 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA) Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at RRA & IA) Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA) Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA)
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) Computer Table 3 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA)
2 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (LW) Cabinets 1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CA)
1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CA) 8 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 1.5m x 0.6m Picture-Book Shelf (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW) (See Vol. 4 for the details of some of the above items.)
Others 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CA) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CA) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (RRA) 8 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Open Table (RRA) 2 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (I A) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 –1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.1-2
VOL.
2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
OTHERS Minimum 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided Direct access and visual connection to be provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to Librarians’ Workroom and Instructional Area where necessary Book drop/chute to allow return of books from outside the MRL to be provided Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to window openings Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to Circulation Counter for easy supervision Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be tempered and sandblasted Half height glass partition for visual access to be provided to Instructional Area and Librarian’s Workroom All windows to have locks
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 368M2 MRL
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 3 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA)
10 nos. (IA) 2 nos. (LW)
Power Points 12 nos. Single Gang (RRA), 6 nos. Single Gang at Counter Area 25 nos. Single Gang (IA) 8 nos. Single Gang (LW)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System at Counter (RRA)
PA System (IA and LW) 1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW)
Water Supply Nil Others 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA)
1 no. LCD (LW)
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.1-3
VOL.
2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 368M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
LEGEND
1. Circulation Area
2. Book Chute
3. Circulation Counter Area
4. Queue Area
5. Reading/Reference Area
6. 5-piece Sofa Set
7. Raised Platform
8. Trapezoidal Tables Area
9. Open Table Area
10. Double-Sided Bookshelves
11. Single-Sided Bookshelves
12. Media Islands Area
13. Picture-Book Shelf, Newspaper Rack, Periodicals Shelf, Atlas Stand
14. AV Equipment Worktop
15. Librarian’s Workroom
16. Timber Open Shelves
17. Teacher’s Table
18. Pin-up Board
19. Work Table Area
20. Single Seat Computer Table Area
21. Filing Cabinet, Steel Cabinet, Copy Machine
22. Instructional Area
23. Double Seat Computer Table Area
24. TV/VCR Cabinet
25. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable
Wall Mounted Projection Screen
26. LCD Projector
27. Overhead Projector Trolley
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.1-4
VOL.
2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY BOOK SHELVES
EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA
EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.2-1
VOL.
2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
NO. OF UNITS 1no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 1070M2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL(1070 M2 TO INCLUDE STAGE, CONTROL ROOM AND CHANGING ROOM)
AREA Min. 910 m2 ( for Seating Area including 3 badminton courts)
Min. 30 m2 (for Stage Area)
A full performance Stage must be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, a minimum basic stage (30 m2) shall be provided.
CAPACITY To provide for maximum student enrolment and teaching staff
FUNCTION For school assembly, talks, concert, school examination and sports like badminton, gymnastics, aerobics, etc.
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY On ground or second storey
Directly accessible from the main entrance of the school
Should be adjacent to the Playfield and Outdoor Courts
Preferably interconnected with Furniture Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE Projection screen should be positioned so that it is highly visible to all students in the Seating Area
School crest to be provided above the stage
SERVICES Row switching control for high bay lighting
Microphone point position should be at same line as curtain line (if full performance stage is provided)
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Steps to be provided at front of the stage
Door into Hall to be min. 1.5m wide
The number and location of access doors should ensure efficient circulation and discharge of students
All openings should be adjustable to cater for varying ventilation and lighting requirements
These openings should be operable from a service platform or corridor
Badminton Area to have a min. clear height of 7.6m
Control Room is to be linked at upper rear of the Hall
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 –1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
REV-01 / MAY 06
ANCILLARY 4.5-1
VOL.
2 CANTEEN
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Total Canteen areas to be min. 700 m2 Each Canteen area to comprise: 1. Refreshment / Seating Area 2. Food Stalls 3. Central Wash Area 4. Stores and toilets
CAPACITY Total Canteen Areas to provide for maximum student enrolment over a maximum of 2 recess periods
FUNCTION For preparation, serving, consumption of meals
LOCATION/PROXIMITY 1st storey accessible by vehicle for goods delivery
Near Field and Playcourts
Away from General Office and Teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE Soap dispenser at students’ wash trough to be provided
SERVICES --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Sufficient clearance outside of the Refreshment /seating area to be provided for queuing at food stalls
Finishes for serving counter, stall worktop & fixtures to be stainless steel
Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium
Separate meters for gas, water and electrical for each stall
Bottle Store to be min. 2.4m wide
Central Wash area to provide separate washing trough for Muslim and non-Muslim stalls
Lockable taps connected to separate meters to be provided at wash areas
Others Minimum 8 nos. Gas points (Foodstall) Hood & Flue over cooking range at food stalls Isolator for Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Fans 2 nos. Water Coolers Minimum 2 nos. Vending Machines
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.5-2
VOL.
2 CANTEEN
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 700 M2 CANTEEN
LEGEND
1. Long Table & Bench
2. Food Stalls
3. Canteen Store/ Toilets/ Central Wash Area/ Bottle Store
4. Wash Trough for Tooth-brushing
5. Water Cooler
6. Vending Machines
7. Public Telephones
REV-00 / FEB 06
ANCILLARY 4.5-3
VOL.
2 CANTEEN
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FOOD STALL / DRINK STALL
TYPICAL ELEVATION OF FOODSTALL FITMENT
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL WASH TROUGH
NON-TEACHING STAFF(NTS) ROOM
VOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.6-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 10 m2
CAPACITY 4 persons
FUNCTION Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Principal’s Office and General Office
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 10 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
NON-TEACHING STAFF (NTS) ROOM
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.6-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Dining Table & Chairs Area
2. High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
REV-00 / FEB 06
HEALTH & FITNESS ROOMVOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.7-1
NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL) 1 no.
AREA 65 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
20 Students
FUNCTION Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas
Away from quiet areas
Preferably on 1st storey
Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Sports Flooring of Homogeneous Vinyl Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 1 no. full length mirror with timber bar 10 sets 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack 10 sets 1.5kg weight Dumbbells on weights’
rack 2 nos. Manual Treadmills for Juniors 2 nos. Bicycle Ergometers for Juniors 2 nos. Rowers (Non-Hydraulic) for Juniors 2 nos. Hydraulic Steppers for Juniors 16 nos. “Step-Training” Platforms 3 nos. Climbing Poles (Galvanised Pipes) 1 no. Target Heart Rate Chart
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 4 nos. of Wall Mounted at 2.5m minimum from
floor level Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.7-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack
3. 1.5 kg weight Dumbbells on weights’ rack
4. Step Training Platforms
5. Bicycle Ergonomics
6. Manual Treadmills
7. Rowers
8. Hydraulic Steppers
9. Low Timber Cabinet
10. 1.5m high x 6mm thick mirror on plywood backing with aluminium trimming (mounted
at 300mm above floor level) and floor mounted 6.0m long 40mm diameter timber wall-bar
at 800mm from floor with 4 anchor points
11. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.8-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 65 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of equipment for physical education/games
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY 1st storey
Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room
FITMENT /FURNITURE High Cabinets to store knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys
High Open Shelves to store hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeeper’s pads, gloves and masks, softball bases, softballs, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes’ batons
SERVICES 1 single power point to be located near teacher’s table
OTHERS Door to be min. 1.2m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STORE
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board 1 no. 1.2m x 2.4m Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Cabinets High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
High Open Shelves 3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls
DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.8-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT ROOM
LEGEND LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table 1. Teacher’s Table
2. High Cabinet 2. High Cabinet
3. High Open Shelves 3. High Open Shelves
4. Aluminium Cages 4. Aluminium Cages
5. Pin-up Board 5. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
CCA ROOM
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.9-1
NO. OF UNITS 3 nos.
AREA
65 m2 195 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY --
FUNCTION For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Away from Teaching Area
Preferably on 1st storey
Near Field and Games Equipment Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE 2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear
wall length 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front
Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Student’s Table 10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m Cabinets 2 nos. Filing Cabinets DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 1 no. Single Gang
2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. of Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
CCA ROOM
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.9-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 CCA ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s & Students’ Tables Area
2. Filing Cabinet
3. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
4. Pin-up Board
REV-01 / MAY 06
BOOKSHOPVOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.10-1
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 12 m 2
CAPACITY 1 – 2 Staff
FUNCTION For sale of books and stationery
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Must be on 1st Storey
Near Canteen
Away from Classrooms and Staff Area
FITMENT/FURNITURE Counter cabinet should not be higher than 750mm high
SERVICES --
OTHERS Grilles (if any) for the counter should be fixed on the external side of the roller shutter
Roller shutter to be min. 1.8m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters
Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications 1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
BOOKSHOP
VOL.
2 ANCILLARY 4.10-2
LEGEND
1. Counter Cabinet
2. High Open Shelves Area
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP
REV-01 / MAY 06
DENTAL CLINICVOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.11-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 42 m2
CAPACITY 2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist
2 students
FUNCTION For carrying out dental health services
LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st storey
Away from Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles
Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop
Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D)
Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle
Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser
Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass door panels
Wall Cabinet to have 1 adjustable shelf within
SERVICES Compressor Compartment:
a. shall have a clear height of 2200mm b. light switch shall be located outside the
compartment for easy reach c. control switch to the compressor shall be
located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic
d. Door to compartment to be 1.2m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset
e. shall have 1 light fitting
Dental Unit:
a. The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter. (See diagram on 4.11-3)
b. Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs
c. Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit
d. Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator
Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch.
DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Windows shall be sliding type and top hung above. No fixed glass windows are allowed
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets Long Cabinet with Sinks
High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others Waiting Bench
Worktable
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Grilles to all Windows and Vents
Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no.
for each Dental chair) Power Points 6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental
Clinic) 1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment)
Lighting (Lux) See critical information for details Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications 2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable
PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic) Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
DENTAL CLINIC
VOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.11-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Dental Units
2. Long Cabinet with Sinks
3. Worktable
4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser
5. Space for Autoclave
6. Waiting Area
7. High Cabinet
8. Waiting Bench
9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard
WSC Water Stop Cock
PTD Paper Towel Dispenser
SD Soap Dispenser
REV-01 / MAY 06
DENTAL CLINICVOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.11-3
LEGEND 1. Drain Connection
40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100
2. Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply
3. Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment)
4. Suction Control Cable 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor
5. Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination
6. Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 – 6 bar 5 Microns water filtration (if possible)
7. Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer
TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT
REV-00 / FEB 06
PASTORAL CARE ROOMVOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.12-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 40 m2
Area to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 40 students
FUNCTION For conducting Pastoral Care activities
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Pastoral Care Room should be on the same storey as Counseling Room
Near Counseling Room and Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl Flooring Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of wall length Projection Screen 1 no. 1.5m x 1.5m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Student’s Table 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table
(See Vol. 4 -1.4) Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 10 nos. Big Floor Cushions
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 3 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
PASTORAL CARE ROOM
VOL.
2ANCILLARY 4.12-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Trapezoidal Activity Tables Area
3. Low Cabinet
4. Magnetic Whiteboard
5. Pin-up Board
6. Projection Screen
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 PASTORAL CARE ROOM
5 Services & Circulation
5.1
Toilets
5.2 LAN Room
5.3
Central Server Room
5.4 FAVE Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION
5.1-1
VOL.
2 TOILETS
NO. OF UNITS As required
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT
AREA As required
CAPACITY For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin
For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins
If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female.
The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students.
A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.
FUNCTION Showering, changing, toilets needs
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets.
Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas.
Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area.
Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet.
Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block.
4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FITMENT /FURNITURE The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality.
All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students.
At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.
FINISHES
Floor Non-Slip Tiles Wall Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Soap Dispenser 1 no. for every two basins Cleansing Tap 1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet
cubicle
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer
Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan
Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Wall Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply 1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle Others 13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets
Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet. 1 no. Electric Hand Dryer Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles 7 nos. Water Coolers
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION
5.1-2
VOL.
2 TOILETS
FITMENT /FURNITURE (CON’T) Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter.
Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble.
All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing.
Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing.
Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly.
Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles.
Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle.
Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.
SERVICES Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level.
Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans.
Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas.
Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source.
Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets.
Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet.
Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials.
Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height.
Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle.
Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS
PEDESTAL TYPE
SQUAT PAN TYPE
URINAL
WASH BASIN
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 LAN ROOM SERVICES &
CIRCULATION 5.2-1
NO. OF UNITS As required
AREA 7.5 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION --
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES FCU = 2
Heatload = 3.9KW
Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW
Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC
R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors
Room height to be 2.7m minimum
Maximum weight allowed: 1,500kg
No windows allowed
No viewing panel on door
No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room
All openings to be sealed or airtight
To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening
Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point
For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Wall Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with
Insulation on Inner Wall Ceiling Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
FITMENT/FURNITURE Racks (by others) 3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer)
2 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others Heat and Smoke detectors
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
2 LAN ROOM 5.2-2 SERVICES & CIRCULATION
LEGEND
1. Rack
2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level)
3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level)
4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 5.3-1
VOL.
2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
NO. OF UNITS 1 No.
AREA Min. 12.6 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION --
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office
Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES FCU = 4
Heat Load = 9KW
Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW
Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC
R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (minimum internal clearance)
Room height to be min. 2.7m
Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg
No window allowed
No viewing panel allowed on door
No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room
All openings to be sealed or airtight
To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening
Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point
For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Wall Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with
Insulation on Inner Wall Ceiling Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
FITMENT/FURNITURE Rack 5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer)
4 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 –2.3)
2 nos. of Telephone Points Water Supply Nil Others Heat and Smoke Detector
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION
5.3-2
VOL.
2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
LEGEND
1. Rack
2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level)
3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level)
4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 5.4-1
VOL.
2 FAVE AREA
AREA
10% of school’s circulation area (approximately 890 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.
LOCATION
Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.
FUNCTION
To provide space for school’s future expansion or modification of existing facilities.
Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.
OTHERS
If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 42 nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Before expansion
Corridor
Study CornerStaircase Room Space
Room Space “FAVE”
space
Corridor
Staircase Room Space
Study Corner “optimized”
After expansion
6 External Works
6.1
Carpark, Driveway & Porch
6.2 Field, Fence & Footbath
6.3
Play Courts & Parade Square
6.4 Outdoor Fitness Area
6.5
Gates & Signwall
6.6 Guard Post
REV-00 / FEB 06
EXTERNAL WORKS 6.1-1
VOL.
2 CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL
NO. OF UNITS
As required.
To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.
Carpark Lots 23 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m Motorcycle Lots 6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m
REV-00 / FEB 06
EXTERNAL WORKS 6.1-2
VOL.
2 CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY
SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.2-1
VOL.
2 FIELD, FENCE &
FOOTBATHEXTERNAL WORKS
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
FIELD SIZE Fenced-up area = 40.0m x 80.0m or 0.32ha (inclusive of tree-planting, buffer, etc.)
A buffer of 3m all round field
FIELD ORIENTATION Ideally North-South
Maximum deviation: 45° to North-South axis
HIGH FENCE A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions:
Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4
At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located
Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road
If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15° or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope. A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m
DRAINAGE Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building
Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement
To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works for the field.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL
FINISHES
Fence Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted
Sub-Soil Drain To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer
GATES
Field Gates 2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field
Side Gates 1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field
Exit Gates 2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard “Emergency Exit Only” at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principal’s request.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Others 2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.2-2
VOL.
2 FIELD, FENCE & FOOTBATH
EXTERNAL WORKS
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF PRIMARY SCHOOL FIELD
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.2-3
VOL.
2 FIELD, FENCE &
FOOTBATHEXTERNAL WORKS
SECTION A-A PLAN OF FOOTBATH
ELEVATION 1 PLAN OF G.S GRATING
SECTION B-B
SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.2-4
VOL.
2 FIELD, FENCE & FOOTBATH
EXTERNAL WORKS
CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE
Front Elevation
Side Elevation
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-1
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
NO. OF UNITS Play Courts – 2 nos. Parade Square – 1 no.
LOCATION To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways
Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint
NETBALL COURT Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts
ALL COURTS Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts
Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court
Avoid planting tall trees near courts
Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level
All lines to be 50mm wide
Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts
PARADE SQUARE Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m
Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square
A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square
Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL
FINISHES
Basketball Backboard Support of Galvanized Steel & Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’
Volleyball/Sepak Takraw
Galvanized Steel Post & Painted Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’
Netball Court Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated with the Parade Square)
Parade Square Interlocking Pavers
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-2
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
NETBALL GOAL POST
NETBALL COURT (TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)
Elevation
Goal Ring
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-3
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
Front Elevation Side Elevation
BASKETBALL POST
BASKETBALL COURT
See Detail A
DETAIL A
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-4
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
REV-00 / 28 JAN 04
VOLLEYBALL COURT (COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )
DETAIL B
DETAIL A
See Detail B
See Detail A
VOLLEYBALL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-5
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.3-6
VOL.
2 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM
SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.4-1
VOL.
2 OUTDOOR FITNESS AREAEXTERNAL WORKS
AREA 120 m2 or 30.0m X 4.0m
LOCATION Area to be located free from underground services
OTHERS School principal to select 7 out of 11 fitness equipment
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED FITNESS EQUIPMENT FOR PRIMARY SCHOOLS
Horizontal Ladder
Climbing Ropes
Inclined Flex Arm Hang
Step Up/ Astride Jump Benches Leg Raise
Forward Jump
Vertical Ladder
Pull-up Bars
Parallel Bars
Sit-up Bench (4 pieces)
Balance Beam
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.5-1
VOL.
2 GATES & SIGNWALLEXTERNAL WORKS
MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE Open inwards
Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes)
1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves
Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy
Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm.
SIGNWALL School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:
Malay
Chinese
Tamil
English
School crest to be provided
School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above first storey
OTHERS To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school. This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis. Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Plan
Plan
Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION
Elevation SIDE GATE
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.5-2
VOL.
2 GATES & SIGNWALL EXTERNAL WORKS
SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL
SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
6.6-1
VOL.
2 GUARD POSTOTHER FACILITIES
AREA Max. 4sqm CAPACITY 2 security officers
FUNCTION To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates;
To log in visitor’s particulars and issue entry passes;
To monitor activities on CCTV screen
LOCATION / PROXIMITY To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors.
FITMENT / FURNITURE Minimal provision.
Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors’ enquiry.
SERVICES Lighting and power points as required to be provided. Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate. Connection to school’s CCTV network to be provided.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Guard post design should not be opulent.
Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft.
Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security.
Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required.
Exterior view GUARD POST
Interior of GUARD POST
Master Revision List
Index
Master Revision List
Design Handbook Vol. 2 – Primary School
S/ No.
Page No. Revision No.
Circular No. / Circular Date
Amendment
1. 1.1-1 01 03/2006 (May 06) Critical Info>Others - Proper distribution of M&E services Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of “Security Key System” - Renamed “Alarm System”
2. 1.2-1 & 2 01 03/2006 (May 06) Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted “ * ” Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Amended type of Security System Pg. 1.2-2>Legend: – Inserted items 13 to 15
3. 2.2-1 01 03/2006 (May 06) Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Pin-up board: - Amended text Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Kiln: - Rearranged text
4. 2.7-1 01 03/2006 (May 06) Critical info>No. of units: - Amended no. of units Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor: – Amended page reference Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Ceiling: - Omitted “Suspended Ceiling”
8. 4.11-1 01 03/2006 (May 06) Critical info>Fitment/furniture: - Amended detail on wall hung cabinet & wall cabinet Critical info>Services>Compressor compartment: - Amended door dimensions. >Services>Dental unit – Amended page reference >Others -Amended Windows Recommended Provisions>Finishes: - Amended ceiling type
SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006
Vol. 3
Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike. Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable. The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition. As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
REV 00 / FEB 06
School Design Handbook
Vol. 3 > SECONDARY SCHOOL <
CONTENTS Introduction
1 General Teaching 1.1 Classroom 1.2 Mother Tongue Language Room
2 Special Teaching 2.1 Humanities Room 2.2 Humanities Workroom 2.3 Commerce Room 2.4 Art & Crafts Room 2.5 Project Room 2.6 Casting Room 2.7 Art Store 2.8 Audio Visual Room 2.9 Audio Visual Store 2.10 Music Room 2.11 Music Store 2.12 Computer Room 2.13 IT Learning Resource Room 2.14 Chemistry Laboratory 2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory 2.16 Science Laboratory’s Preparation Room 2.17 Kitchen 2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room 2.19 Needlework Room
REV 00 / FEB 06
3 Design & Technology 3.1 D&T Studio 1 3.2 D&T Studio 2 3.3 Wood Machineshop 3.4 Design Room 3.5 Design Room Store 3.6 D & T Studio Store
7.6 Guard Post List of Abbreviations User’s Reference Master Revision List
Introduction
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 INTRODUCTION
1.0 Introduction
1.1 The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the school’s facilities.1
2.0 Planning Parameters
2.1 The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario:
School operating on a single-session model Having a max. enrolment of 1520 students (critical session)
2.2 In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated.
3.0 How to use this Volume
3.1 Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured.
3.2 The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility.
3.3 As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or other details due to the school’s specific programmes, Consultants are required to seek the school’s and MOE’s advice as to the relevancy of the information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it and the implications, if any, accordingly.
1 The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary School’s Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1 - Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).
1 General Teaching
1.1
Classroom
1.2 Mother Tongue Language Room
REV-01 / MAY 06
GENERAL TEACHING
VOL.
3
1.1-1
CLASSROOM1.1-1
NO. OF UNITS (per school) Min. 34 When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 38 (90 m2 each). AREA Minimum module of 45 m2 per classroom When required, area must be able to revert to 90 m2 (38 units).
CAPACITY For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students
For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room
FUNCTION General Instruction Area
Other possible functions include – project work, multi-group activity, independent learning
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Quiet zone
Preferably near the Special Teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE Students’ seating to be minimum 3m clear from whiteboard
Moveable wall partition if installed should have a minimum sound insulation of 42 dBA.
State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind
SERVICES --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant
Window arrangement and other façade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds As required Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall
length Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Students’ Table 35 nos. 0.6m x 0.5m Computer Table 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m State Flag 1 no. to comply with specifications
(See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Moveable Wall Partition
As required
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Security System As required Others Nil
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher) Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher)
4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted
1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/ Blinds As required Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Students’ Table 16 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m Cabinets High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
(See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Others 2 nos. Table for Typewriters 1 no. Reception Counter
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 12 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 12 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher
& 1 no. for printer) 14 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
3 nos. Telephone Points Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. TV
1 no. Fax Machine 1 no. Photocopier DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 COMMERCE ROOM 2.3-2 SPECIAL TEACHING
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Table Area
3. Reception Counter
4. Sofa Set
5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard and Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
6. Table for Typewriter
7. Photocopier & Fax Machine on Low Cabinet
8. LCD projector
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMMERCE ROOM
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
3 ART & CRAFTS ROOM SPECIAL
TEACHING 2.4-1
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1 no.
AREA Min. 135 m2
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 1-2 Staff/Supervisors
40 Students
FUNCTION Instructional Strategies
Still life sketching and other Art and Crafts activities
Storage of Art works and materials
Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Min. 1 Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/ bulky projects and for drying pottery/clay sculptures
2 Art & Crafts Rooms shall preferably be located on the ground floor
Interconnected with Art Store, Casting Room and Project Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish
Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items
All fitment located outside Art and Crafts Room must be weather-resistant
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
SERVICES Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session
OTHERS Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a 2.5m minimum shelter/ overhang to protect from rain
Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from the Art and Crafts Room
Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for display
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain/Blinds Blackout Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic with 1m
Manuscript Lines integrated with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Computer Table 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Cabinets
High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Others 40 nos. Practice Modules
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door
Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher,
1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. TV
1 no. Piano 1 no. Hi-Fi set Other Instruments DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 MUSIC ROOM SPECIAL TEACHING 2.10-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 MUSIC ROOM
MODULE C:
TEACHING PURPOSE
MODULE A:
ORCHESTRA PRACTICE
MODULE B:
CHOIR PRACTICE
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Module A
3. Piano
4. Computer Table Area
5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board,
Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
6. LCD Projector
7. TV
8. Full Height Mirror
VOL.
MUSIC STORESPECIAL TEACHING 2.11-1
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 45 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of musical instruments, teaching aids and accessories
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with Music Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE All shelves to be adjustable
SERVICES --
OTHERS Room to be 5.0m minimum wide Door to be 1.2m – 1.5m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 STORE
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets 1 no. cabinet for curriculum music
1 no. cabinet for band instruments
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 MUSIC STORESPECIAL TEACHING
2.11-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 45 M2 MUSIC STORE
LEGEND
1. Cabinet for Curriculum Music
2. Cabinet for Band Instrument
2 Special Teaching
2.1
Humanities Room
2.11 Music Store
2.2
Humanities Workroom
2.12 Computer Room
2.3
Commerce Room
2.13 IT Learning Resource Room
2.4
Art & Crafts Room
2.14 Chemistry Laboratory
2.5 Project Room
2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory
2.6
Casting Room
2.16 Science Laboratory’s Preparation
Room/Store
2.7 Art Store
2.17 Kitchen
2.8
Audio Visual Room
2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room/Store
2.9
Audio Visual Store
2.19 Needlework Room
2.10 Music Room
COMPUTER ROOM
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.12-1
REV-00 / FEB 06
3NO. OF UNITS Min. 4
AREA Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom)
CAPACITY 1 Staff
40 Students
FUNCTION Hands-on computer-based learning
Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with Computer Workroom
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES 1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table
1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teacher’s table
Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided
Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4-1.3)
Wall Emulsion Paint 1.8m x 1.2m viewing glass panel on Computer Workroom wall
Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain As required Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.3m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom) Computer Table 21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door
Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for
printer & 1 no. for workroom) Power Points 26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher,
1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom) 1 no. Single Gang for LCD
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
COMPUTER ROOM
VOL.
3 SPECIAL
TEACHING 2.12-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Computer Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. LCD Projector
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM
REV-01 /MAY 06
VOL.
3 IT LEARNING
RESOURCE ROOMSPECIAL TEACHING 2.13-1
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 90 m2
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 1 Staff
42 Students
FUNCTION Hands-on Computer based Group Learning
Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES 1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in Cable TV outlet box for 2 computer tables
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 -2.3)
Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with
High Cabinet Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m Computer Table
14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Cabinets
High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door
Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
printer) Power Points 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher
& 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Master Switch
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.13-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Computer Tables Area
3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
4. LCD Projector
VOL.
CHEMISTRY LABORATORYSPECIAL TEACHING 2.14-1
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 NO. OF UNITS Min. 2
AREA Min. 144 m2
CAPACITY 1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION For conducting Chemistry lessons and experiments Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 1st storey Near Biology and Physics laboratories Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Interconnected with Science Preparation Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE 4 students to 1 student’s workbench 4 nos. workbench cum cabinet to be provided at side and/or rear of lab (See sample layouts 1 & 2) Sufficient knee space along both lengths of students’ workbench to be provided so that 4 students (facing each other) can sit comfortably during group activities Acid resistant top to workbenches to be epoxy resin Workbenches to have anti-spill edge Sinks and sanitary piping to be polypropylene Safety Screen for Teacher’s Bench to be provided
SERVICES Fume cupboard to have 1 no. gas point Teacher’s workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each student’s bench to have 2 nos. gas points, 1 no. computer point located at the side nearest the central aisle, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 6 nos. twin gang power points evenly distributed and 2 nos. sinks Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories Exhaust duct to roof level to be provided for fume cupboard All trenches to have solid trench cover composing of steel frame and tile infill Authorities’ requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with
OTHERS Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students’ workbenches area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 144 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blackout Curtains Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable Teacher’s Bench 1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink Students’ Bench 10 nos. 3.6m x 0.8m with Sink Cabinets Side/Rear Cabinet cum Workbench with Sink Others 1 no. Fume Cupboard
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock
Overhead emergency shower 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports 11 nos. (10 nos. for students’ benches, 1 no. for teacher’s bench)
Power Points 30 nos. Twin Gang 1 no. Single Gang for LCD
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 13 nos. 3-way swan neck lab taps
1 no. for emergency shower Others 26 nos. gas points (double outlet) 1 nos. gas point for fume cupboard DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
3 CHEMISTRY LABORATORYSPECIAL TEACHING 2.14-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for elongated lab)
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for square lab)
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Bench with Sink on 0.15m high platform
FUNCTION For conducting Physics and Biology lessons and experiments Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY All Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Every 2 labs to be interconnected with Science Preparation Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE 4 students (with 2 sets of 2 students facing each other) to one student’s workbench
Acid resistant worktops to laboratory benches to be epoxy resin
Workbenches in Physics laboratories to have bull-nosed edge
Workbenches in Biology laboratories to have anti-spill edge
Sufficient knee clearance for seated students to be provided at all workbenches
Safety Screen for Teacher’s Bench to be provided
SERVICES Teacher’s workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point
At each island core unit, 3 nos. water points shall be provided. Where the side is to be connected to the students’ bench, there shall be 2 nos. computer point & 2 nos. twin gang power points each
Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 4 nos. twin gang power points and 2 nos. LAN points evenly distributed
Services pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories
All services trenches to have solid trench cover composed of steel frame and tile infill
Authorities’ requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with
OTHERS Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students’ seating area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 144 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Blackout Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m
Projection Screen 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable Teacher’s Bench 1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink Students’ Bench 10 nos. 1.6 m x 1.0 m Cabinets 3 nos. 8.1m x 0.8m Side Workbench with Sink
CLOSE-UP OF ISLAND CORE UNIT AT STUDENTS’ WORKBENCH
SCIENCE LABORATORY’SPREPARATION ROOM
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.16-1 3
NO. OF UNITS Min. 3
AREA Min. 50 m2
CAPACITY 2 Staff
FUNCTION Preparation for experiments, storage of equipment & work area for Laboratory Assistant
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with Science Laboratories
FITMENT/FURNITURE Acid resistant worktop to be epoxy resin
Sinks and sanitary pipes to be polypropylene
Workbench to be designed to accommodate computer workstations at appropriate height and with knee clearances for staff seating
Overhead storage cabinet to have glass doors
Movable high cabinet to have timber-framed glass doors with ventilation gaps
SERVICES Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor Lab Preparation Room
LAN points to be 200mm above counter top
OTHERS Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m
Connecting doors to be provided to laboratories
Doors to be located near entrance of laboratories
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 50 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles Wall Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets Workbench cum overhead storage with 2
Workstations and Sink Movable High Cabinet with Glass Doors (See Vol. 4 - 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm (for Chemistry Preparation Room) Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
Solid Door
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 2 nos. Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Taps Others 2 nos. Gas Points (double outlet) DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3
SPECIAL TEACHING 2.16-2
SCIENCE LABORATORY’S PREPARATION ROOM
LEGEND
1. Workbench cum overhead storage with 2 Workstations and Sink
2. Cabinet with Glass Door
PHOTOS OF SCIENCE LABORATORY’S PREPARATION ROOM/STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 50 M2 LAB PREPARATION ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 KITCHEN SPECIAL TEACHING 2.17-1
NO. OF UNITS Min. 2
AREA Min. 125 m2 comprising: 1. Instructional area
2. Practical area
3. Resource area (for 1 kitchen only)
CAPACITY 1 Staff
20 Students
FUNCTION For cookery lessons
Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on the 1st storey and should not be higher than the 2nd storey
Interconnected with Kitchen Preparation Room
All kitchens preferably on same storey, but Needlework Room can be on different storey
FITMENT/FURNITURE 2 students per workbench
Sinks to be well distributed and accessible from workbench
Teacher’s Demonstration Bench to incorporate double bowl sink with space for electric cum gas cooker at the end
SERVICES Student’s workbench and Teacher’s demonstration bench to have 1 no. twin gang, 1 no. single gang and power point each
Ceiling fans are not to be located directly above gas hob
LAN and power points for computers to be appropriately distributed at front and rear of kitchen
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS
2 Kitchens with 1 preparation room/store to be provided for all schools including boys’ school
Solar panels are to be located on the accessible RC Flat roof nearest to kitchens
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 125 M2 TYPE FACILITY
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles Wall Glazed Ceramic Tiles to min 2.2m height Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 3.5m x 0.6m Teacher’s Demonstration
Bench Students’ Table 10 nos. 3.7m x 0.6m Students’ Workbench Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Low Cabinet Resource Corner Cabinet (for 1 kitchen only) Low Cabinet with Louvred Door Low Cabinet with Louvred Door with Sink Open Shelves Display Cabinet
Others 2 nos. 1.5m x 0.8m Storage Table 4 nos. double bowl sink & 2 nos. single bowl for students 1 no. single bowl sink for teacher
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 5 nos. Power Points 13 nos. Twin Gang
18 nos. Single Gang (including 2 nos. for Resource Corner)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 8 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. Swan-neck per sink (Hot and Cold) Others 1 no. LCD
11 nos. Gas Point 1 no. Solar Heater 11 nos. Electric cum Gas Cooker 1 no. Refrigerator 2 nos. Microwave Oven
Low Cabinet with Sink Wall Hung Display Cabinet Charts Cabinet High Cabinet with Drawers Worktop with High Cabinet High Cabinet Low Cabinet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.6m Wash Trough [Laundry Area] 1 no. Laundry Trough
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 3 nos. 13 Amp
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GENERAL INSTRUCTION AREA (min. 51 m2)
3 Design & Technology
3.1
D&T Studio 1
3.2 D&T Studio2
3.3
Wood Machineshop
3.4 Design Room
3.5
Design Room Store
3.6 D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store)
3.7
D&T Staff Room
3.8 D&T Studio (LS)
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO 1
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.1-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 360 M2 TYPE FACILITY
NO. OF UNITS 1 nos.
AREA Min. 360 m2
CAPACITY 3 Staff
56 students
FUNCTION Multi-purpose D&T Studio (mainly woodwork and metalwork) for upper secondary students
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from quiet zone
Must be on 1st storey
Interconnected with Tool Store and Wood Machineshop
Near Main Store, D&T Staff Room and D&T Switch Room
Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE Concrete countertop shall be epoxy paint finish
SERVICES Isolator to be provided for each equipment except folding machines and treadle shears
All machines to be provided with 3 phase electrical supply 440V
Equipment on stands to be fixed at 0.6m above F.F.L
Gas Forges to be served by ducted mechanical exhaust system with hoods
OTHERS Spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances to be complied with
Safety zone for equipment to be 0.9m all around, where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column
Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m
Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide
Backsplash to be in epoxy paint finish
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Service and access road to technical block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery
Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. width of 1.8m Unloading/ Loading floor slab at 2nd storey should be strengthened for heavy machinery and vibration
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m Integrated Bench 22 nos. 1.53m x 0.9m Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door
Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Points Nil Power Points 18 nos. 13A Single Gang
2 nos. 15A Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 14 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply 6 nos. (3 nos. per sink) Equipment 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m Brazing Hearths & Gas
Forging Hearths 5 nos. 1000kg 1.5m x 0.8m Metal Lathes 1 no. 120kg 0.7m x 0.7m Pedestal Grinder 1 no. 30kg 0.6m x 0.6m Welding Unit 1 no. 1500kg 1.2m x 1.0m Milling Machine 1 no. 240kg 1.0m x 0.8m Power Hacksaw 1 no. 400kg 1.2m x 1.0m Folding Machine 1 no. 500kg 1.2m x 1.5m Treadle Shears 1 no. 150kg 0.7m x 0.5m Pillar Drill 2 nos. 300kg 1.5m x 0.7m Wood Lathes 1 no. CNC Lathe/ Mill 2 nos. 100kg 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machine
Others 16 nos. Isolator 2 nos. Gas Points 7 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points 2 nos. Exhaust Fans (for Gas Forging Hearths) DB Closet as required
REV-01 / May 06
D&T STUDIO 1
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.1-2
LEGEND
1. Integrated Benches Area 11. Treadle Shears
2. Teacher’s Table 12. Brazing Hearths & Gas Forging Hearths With Isolator
3. Metal Lathes with Isolators 13. Pedestal Grinder with Isolator
4. Finishing Area 14. Welding Unit With Isolator
5. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers 15. Milling Machine With Isolator
6. LCD Projector 16. CNC Machine
7. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks 17. Power Hacksaw with Isolator
8. Buffing Machines with Isolators 18. Pillar Drill with Isolator
9. Wood Lathes with Isolators 19. Whiteboard & Projector Screen
10. Folding Machine 20. Emergency Stop Station Point
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 360 M2 STUDIO
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO 1
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.1-3
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA
FINISHING AREA
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO 1
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.1-4
LAYOUT OF METAL LATHES AREA
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF WOOD LATHES LAYOUT
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF METAL LATHES LAYOUT
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
ALTERNATIVE LAYOUTS OF WOOD LATHE AREA
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO 2
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.2-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 240 M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA Min. 240 m2
CAPACITY 3 Staff
56 students
FUNCTION Multi-purpose D&T Studio for lower secondary students
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from quiet zone
Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than second storey
Interconnected with Tools Store
Near D&T Studio 1, Design Room and Main Store
Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Concrete countertop shall be epoxy finish
The spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances and should be complied with
Where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column
Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m
Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide
Service and access road to D&T block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery
Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. width of 1.8m
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Note:
D&T Studio (Lower Secondary (LS)) is to be provided for schools offering only lower secondary D&T curriculum
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and
Retractable Teacher’s Table 2 nos. Integrated Bench 22 nos. 1.525m x 0.9m Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door
Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 22 nos. 13A Single Gang
2 nos. 15A Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 10 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 3 nos. cold Equipment 2 nos. 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machines
5. Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink 11. Emergency Stop Station Point
6. LCD Projector
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA
3 Design & Technology
3.1
D&T Studio 1
3.2 D&T Studio2
3.3
Wood Machineshop
3.4 Design Room
3.5
Design Room Store
3.6 D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store)
3.7
D&T Staff Room
3.8 D&T Studio (LS)
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
3 WOOD MACHINESHOP
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.3-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 124 M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA Min. 124 m2 (including Timber Store)
CAPACITY 8 Persons
FUNCTION Preparation of timber works by staff and storage of timber
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Must be located at 1st storey away from quiet area
Direct access from Design & Technology Studio 1 and corridor
Nearby Design & Technology Studio 2, Studio Store 1 and Studio Store 2
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Relationship of equipment should not be changed as they relate to work flow and safety requirement
Room should be rectangular and column free
Clear height of room to be 3.6m min.
Door to be min. 1.8m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m Others 1 no. 0.5m x 0.4m Stainless Steel Sink
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
Solid Door Grilles to all Windows and Vents
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 5 nos. Single Gang (1 no. for Timber Store) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted (1 no. for Timber Store) Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. cold Equipment 1 no. 290kg 0.8m x 0.5m Cross-out Saw
1 no. 250kg 0.7m x 0.6m Mortiser 1 no. 250kg 0.8m x 0.5m Bandsaw 1 no. 550kg 0.9m x 0.8m Thicknesser 1 no. 500kg 1.7m x 0.8m Surface Planer 1 no. 250kg 1.5m x 2.2m Rip Saw 1 no. 75kg 0.5m diameter Dust Extractor 1 no. 0.8m x 0.5m Grinder
Others 8 nos. Isolators 3 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 WOOD MACHINESHOP DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.3-2
LEGEND
1. Bandsaw with Isolator 2. Mortiser with Isolator 3. Rip Saw with Isolator 4. Thicknesser with Isolator 5. Cross-out Saw with Isolator 6. Surface Planer with Isolator
7. Timber Store Area 8. Grinder with Isolator 9. Stainless Steel Sink 10. Dust Extractor with Isolator 11. Magnetic Whiteboard 12. Emergency Stop Station Point
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 124 M2 WOOD MACHINESHOP SHOWING CRITICAL DIMENSIONS AND THEIR RELATIONSHIPS (RELATED TO WORKFLOW)
REV-01 / MAY 06
DESIGN ROOM DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
VOL.
3 3.4-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 200 M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA 200 m2
Area to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 2 Staff
40 Students divided into 2 groups
FUNCTION Design and Drafting
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Within D&T Area
Should not be above 3rd storey
Interconnected with Design Room Store
Near D&T Studio 2, Main Store and D&T Staff Room
Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 1.8m (external) wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen 2 nos. 2.1m x 2.1m Mounted and Retractable Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.9m x 0.8m Students’ Table 20 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m Cabinets
Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Others Computer Workbench with leg space
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
Grilles to all windows and vents 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 7 nos. Power Points
35 nos. Twin Gang (including 20 nos. for 20 students’ tables) 5 nos. Single Gang
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 12 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN ROOM
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.4-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 200 M2 DESIGN ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Table Area
3. Activity Area
4. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers
5. Computer Workbench with leg space
6. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
7. LCD Projector
8. Projection Screen
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
3 DESIGN ROOM STORE DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.5-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 20 M2 STORE
AREA 20 m2
Area to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of equipment, components and students’ project work
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION Interconnected with Design Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Handles and locks to be provided for drawers and doors of cabinets
SERVICES --
OTHERS Door width to be min. 1.2m
Openings for ventilation (with louvers) to be provided above the cabinets
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
High Shelves for Studio Store Low Cabinets with Open Shelves for Main Store
Others Nil
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security Alarm Burglar Alarm (Main Store) Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher (Studio Store)
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Roller Shutter Grilles to all Windows and Vents
SERVICES/EQUPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Single Gang each Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted each Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 D&T STUDIO STORE 1. Studio Store 2. Main Store
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.6-2
ALTERNATIVE 1 ALTERNATIVE 2
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FITMENT LAYOUT FOR DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO STORE AND MAIN STORE
LEGEND
1. High Shelves (for Design & Technology Studio Stores) OR
Low Cabinet with Open Shelves (for Main Store)
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 D&T STAFF ROOM DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.7-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 24 M2 STAFF ROOM
AREA Min. 24 m2
CAPACITY 6 Staff
FUNCTION D&T Staff Office
Can explore provisions for multiple usage
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Within D&T Area
Near D&T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop, Design Room, Main Store, Timber Store and D&T Switch Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Ceiling height to be similar to that of classroom
School to decide whether to house the D&T Staff at the main Staff Room or D&T Staff Room
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 6 nos. Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 D&T STAFF ROOM DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.7-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 D&T STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Staff Tables Area
2. Low Cabinet
3. Pin-up Board
REV-01 / MAY 06
D&T STUDIO (LS)VOL.
3 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 300 M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA Min. 300 m2 (including 24 m2 store)
CAPACITY 3 Staff
Max. 40 students
FUNCTION Multi-purpose D&T Studio and Store for all-girls’ school or schools offering D&T education to lower secondary levels only
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Away from quiet zones
Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than 2nd storey
Not to be located below Chemistry Laboratory
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated
with High Cabinet 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic
Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet
Projection Screen 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and Retractable
Teacher’s Table 2 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m Integrated Bench 22 nos. 1.3m x 0.9m Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sink Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas points equally distributed) High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board High Cabinet with Drawers Open Shelves with Drawers
Storage Closet cum Workstation
1 nos.
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock (Store)
Grilles to all Windows and Vents Roller Shutters 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO (LS)
VOL.
3 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-2
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 3 nos. Power Points 25 nos. 13A
Others 3 nos. Isolator (440V electrical supply) 1 no. Isolator for Exhaust at Gas Forge 5 nos. Gas Points 2 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
D&T STUDIO (LS)VOL.
3 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.8-3
LEGEND 1. Teaching Area
2. Integrated Benches
3. Storage Closet cum workstation
4. High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
5. Teacher’s Table
6. Concrete Counter Cabinets with Sink
7. Open Shelves with Drawers
8. High Cabinet with Drawers
9. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers
10. Folding Machine
11. Treadle Shears
12. Buffing Machines
13. Power Hacksaw
14. Brazing cum Forging Unit with 2 Gas points on wall
15. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas points equally distributed)
16. Magnetic Whiteboard and Projection Screen
17. Emergency Stop Station Point
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 300 M2 D&T STUDIO (FOR LOWER SECONDARY CURRICULUM (LS))
18. Projector and Screen
4 Administrative / Staff
4.1
Principal’s Office
4.8 Counselling Room
4.2
Vice-Principal’s Office
4.9 Prefect’s Room
4.3
General Office
4.10 Career Guidance Room
4.4 Office Store
4.11 Staff Room
4.5
Printing Room
4.12 Staff Lounge
4.6
H.O.D’s Store
4.13 Staff Resource Room
4.7
Meeting Room
4.14 Sick Bay
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3
PRINCIPAL’S OFFICE ADMINISTRATIVE /STAFF 4.1-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 20 m2
CAPACITY 1 Principal 5 Visitors
FUNCTION Principal’s work area
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance
Interconnected with Vice-Principal’s Office and General Office
Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and H.O.Ds’ Office
FITMENT/FURNITURE Built-in safe of Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal
Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe
Safe to be 850mm above FFL
SERVICES --
OTHERS School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
FITMENT/ FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Principal’s Tables 1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Cabinets 1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in safe
2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
Others 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Safe (See Critical Information)
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Vice-Principal’s Table
1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m
Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
Others Nil
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4– 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is
from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Typist’s Table 5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m Cabinets 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards
3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Reception Counter
Others 1 no. Key Deposit Box 1 no. Keyboard 2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) 1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the
General Office 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)
1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO) Power Points 7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for
Scanner & 1 no. for Printer) 3 nos. Single Gang (General Office) 2 nos. Twin Gang (AM) 1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fan Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)
Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Battery Operated Clock
Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel Lightning Warning System Console Photocopier DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF GENERAL OFFICE 4.3-2
VOL.
3
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE
LEGEND
1. AM/OM/CSO Area
2. Typists’ Tables Area
3. Visitors’ Lounge
4. Reception Counter
5. High Cabinet
6. Photocopier
7. Printer/Scanner Area
8. 2-Doors Cupboards
9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
10. Magnetic Whiteboard
11. Pin-up Board
12. Fire Alarm Panel
13. PA System
14. Keyboard
15. Key Deposit Box
REV-00 / FEB 06
ADMINISTRATIVE /STAFF OFFICE STORE
VOL.
3 4.4-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 STORE
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Interconnected with General Office
Near Principal’s & Vice-Principal’s Offices and Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Door to be min. 1.2m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 4 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine,
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Others 11 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance
Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 12 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) Power Points 15 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Retractable Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table
18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang
1 no. Single Gang for LCD Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. LCD
1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
MEETING ROOM ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.7-2
VOL.
3
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area
2. LCD Projector
3. Low Cabinet
4. Pin-up Board
5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-01 / MAY 06
COUNSELLING ROOMADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.8-1
VOL.
3 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA
24 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 5 persons
FUNCTION Private area to counsel students and parents
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably on 2nd storey
Access from corridor
Easily accessible to staff and students
There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it
Counselling Room should be on the same level as Career Guidance Room, preferably next to each other
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FINISHES
Floor Vinyl Flooring Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet Others 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Door with Vision Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang
3 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. Tape Recorder
2 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
COUNSELLING ROOM ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.8-2
VOL.
3
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table)
3. Pouffes Area
4. Low Cabinet
5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
6. Pin-up Board
REV-01 / MAY 06
PREFECTS’ ROOM
VOL.
3 ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.9-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 25 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 12 Students
FUNCTION Prefects’ Meeting and Discussions
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near CCA Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 25 M2 PREFECTS’ ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 1.5m x 0.9m on castors Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Table 4 nos. 1.4m x 0.8m Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
PREFECTS’ ROOM
VOL.
3 4.9-2
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF
LEGEND
1. Tables’ Area
2. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
3. Whiteboard on Castors
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 25 M2 PREFECTS’ ROOM
REV-01 / MAY 06
CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
VOL.
3 ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.10-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA
40 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 12 Persons
FUNCTION Career consultation, advice and exhibition for individual or group
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Career Guidance Room must be on the same storey as Counselling Room
Near Counselling Room, H.O.Ds’ Office and Library
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Pin-Up Board Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 2 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m Computer Table 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet Low Cabinet
Others 1 no. 3.6m min. length x 0.6m Display Stand 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 3 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others DB closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
VOL.
3 ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.10-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Low Cabinet
3. Computer Table
4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
5. Magnetic Whiteboard
6. 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet
7. Pin-up Board
8. Lounge Area (3+1 Sofa Set, Coffee Table, Side Table)
9. Display Stand
10. 2.1m High Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF STAFF ROOM4.11-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 390 M2 STAFF ROOM
NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL) Min. 1
AREA 390 m2 comprising:
1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 <+/- 5%> each)
2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers
CAPACITY 73 Staff
FUNCTION Teaching staff office
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey
Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room
Near General Office, H.O.Ds’ Office and Office Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE Staff workstation to be system furniture
Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wall-mounted
SERVICES The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable
See Vol. 4 – 1.4 on requirements for workstation
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations
Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-in-Charge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools
School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Others 73 nos. Workstation (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock
with Door Closer Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 75 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) Power Points 76 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa
2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door
Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser Others 1 no. Refrigerator
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
STAFF LOUNGE ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.12-2
VOL.
3
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
LEGEND
1. Lounge Sofa Area
2. Journal Rack
3. Low Cabinet with Sink
4. Refrigerator
REV-00 / FEB 06
STAFF RESOURCE ROOMADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 4.13-1
VOL.
3 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS Min. 1
AREA Min. 65 m2
CAPACITY 16 Staff
FUNCTION Repository for shared teaching materials
Preparation of teaching materials
Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably interconnected with Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink
Accessible from General Office for close supervision
Preferably interconnected with General Office
FITMENT /FURNITURE Cater for future air-conditioning
Backsplash to be provided for Sink
SERVICES Power point to be located at table area
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Tables 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Cabinets 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet Others 2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed
Towel Rail and Mirror 1 no. Soap Dispenser
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing
Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 (Bedhead lights to be provided) Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 1 no. Others 1 no. Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
SICKBAY ANCILLARY 4.14-2
VOL.
3
LEGEND
1. Table
2. Folding Single Bed
3. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
4. Sink
5. Dry Wall Partition
6. 2.1m High Curtains
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2
SAMPLE LAYOUT 3
ABOVE : SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF 20 M2 SICK BAY
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1
5 Ancillary
5.1
Media Resource Library
5.9 Games Equipment Room
5.2 Multi-Purpose Hall
5.10 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room
5.3
Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room, Changing Room, Store)
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds (All Areas) Whiteboard 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA) Pin-up Board 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at LW and IA) Projection Screen 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA) Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA)
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) Computer Table 6 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA)
7 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (5 nos. at RRA and 2 nos. at LW)
Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CC) 1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CC) 13 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW)
Others 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CC) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CC) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 20 nos. 1.6m x 0.9m Reading Tables (RRA) 4 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 4 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (IA) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)
ANCILLARY 5.1-2
VOL.
3 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
SERVICES TV point in Reading Reference Area to be located near AV Equipment Worktop
OTHERS Connecting door to Librarian’s Workroom to be near the counter
Min. 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided Direct access and visual connection to be provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to Librarians’ Workroom and Instructional Area where necessary Book drop/chute to allow return of books from outside the MRL to be provided Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to window openings Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to Circulation Counter for easy supervision Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be tempered and sandblasted Half height glass partition for visual access to be provided to Instructional Area and Librarian’s Workroom All windows to have locks
REV-01 / MAY 06
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 8 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA)
13 nos. (IA) 2 nos. (LW)
Power Points 6 nos. Single Gang, 8 nos. Twin Gang, 3 nos. Twin Gang at Counter Area (RRA) 16 nos. Twin Gang, 1 no. Single Gang for LCD (IA) 4 nos. Twin Gang (LW)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications PA System at Counter (RRA)
1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW)
Water Supply Nil Others 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA)
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 2 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications 1 no. of Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
BOOKSHOP
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.6-2
LEGEND
1. Counter Cabinet
2. High Open Shelves Area
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP
NON-TEACHING STAFF (NTS) ROOM
VOL.
3ANCILLARY 5.7-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 10 m2
CAPACITY 4 persons
FUNCTION Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers
Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Near Principal’s Office and General Office
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 10 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) DB Closet 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
NON-TEACHING STAFF (NTS) ROOM
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.7-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Dining Table & Chairs Area
2. High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
REV-01 / MAY 06
HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.8-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 72 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY 1 Staff
20 Students
FUNCTION Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas
Away from quiet areas
Preferably on 1st storey
Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Full length mirror to be mounted 1.5 m high x 6 mm thick on plywood backing with aluminium trimming & mounted 300 mm above floor level
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
SERVICES Fans to be wall mounted at min. 2.5m above floor level
OTHERS Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Sports Flooring or Homogeneous Vinyl Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 2 nos. 2.4m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Cabinets Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4) Others 1 no. full length mirror with timber bar 3 nos. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle 2 nos. Exercise Bench 1 no. Multi-Station Exercise Machine 1 no. Weights’ Rack 1 no. Assisted Pull-Up
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 4 nos. Wall Mounted at 2.5m min. from floor
level Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.8-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 72 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
3. Weights’ Rack
4. Exercise Bench Area
5. Multi-Station Exercise Machine
6. Assisted Pull-up
7. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle
8. Low Cabinet
9. Mirror
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
ANCILLARY 5.9-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 72 m2
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION Storage of equipment for physical education/games
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY 1st storey Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE High Cabinets to store : knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys
High Open Shelves to store : hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeeper’s pads, softballs, gloves and masks, softball bases, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes batons
SERVICES Power point to be located near Teacher’s Table
OTHERS Door to be min. 1.2m wide
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 STORE
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Cabinets High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
High Open Shelves 3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Nil
Power Points 1 no. Single Gang
Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
ANCILLARY 5.9-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 72 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. High Cabinet
3. High Open Shelves
4. Aluminium Cages
5. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
CCA ROOM
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.10-1
NO. OF UNITS 4 nos.
AREA
24 m2 per unit Total of 96 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) CAPACITY --
FUNCTION For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Accessible after school hours without the necessity to pass other areas
Away from quiet areas
Preferably on 1st storey
Preferably grouped together
Near Field and Games Equipment Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE 2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard
SERVICES --
OTHERS --
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear
wall length 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front
Projection Screen Nil Teacher’s Table 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m Student’s Table 16 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m Cabinets 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinets
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Vision
Panel if on 1st storey
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 1 no. Single Gang
2 nos. Twin Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. of Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
CCA ROOM
VOL.
3 ANCILLARY 5.10-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 CCA ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teacher’s Table
2. Students’ Table Area
3. Filing Cabinet
4. Pin-up Board
5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 NCC/NPCC ROOM ANCILLARY 5.11-1
NO. OF UNITS 2 Nos.
AREA 24 m2 per unit Total of 48 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY Maximum 16 persons (Staff and Students)
FUNCTION CCA activities for NCC/NPCC
Can be converted to other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably at the lower storeys and not in the basement
Near Rifle Range, Armoury and CCA Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES --
OTHERS Ceiling height to be similar to that of Classroom
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Wall Emulsion Paint Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Projection Screen Nil Others Nil
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Nil Others Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Vision
Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 1 no. Power Points 5 nos. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans 2 nos. of Ceiling Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others Nil
5 Ancillary
5.1
Media Resource Library
5.9 Games Equipment Room
5.2 Multi-Purpose Hall
5.10 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room
5.3
Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room, Changing Room, Store)
Fans 4 nos. Wall Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. “Firing in Progress” Lighting Sign Box to
each entrance/ exit to range
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)ANCILLARY 5.12-2
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)
LEGEND A – Min. 1500 Lux at Target area B1 & B2 – Min. 300 Lux P1 – Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to protect light P2 – Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to prevent shooting into ceiling and
to protect lighting P3 – Approved Treated Hardwood Timber Board. Board (600 x 600 x 40mm
thick) to be wall mounted behind the target and centered on the target Note: All screws fixing to be sunken stainless steel with appropriate plug cover
SAMPLE OF A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 RIFLE RANGE (OUTDOOR)ANCILLARY 5.13-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 208 m2 Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 2 Supervisors (Staff)
40 Students
10 nos. targets
FUNCTION Rifle shooting Practice
Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Outdoor Open range on ground
Interconnected with Armoury
Near NCC/NPCC Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE Table support for target carriage conveyor should be bolted to the ground
Table support should be made of concrete or masonry
Table top to be a min. thickness of 50mm concrete, sealed to protect the surface and finished with a rounded edge.
Cranked type target conveyor system to be used
SERVICES Unless otherwise specified, services should not be located within the firer’s zone, range and armoury
Any electrical cabling within the range to be contained within galvanized iron conduit and run behind the firer’s zone
Spacing between targets indicated are absolute minimum values
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Openings only allowed on back wall
Door location and operation to comply with FSSD and ISD requirements
required. Concrete Vent Block to back wall only Ceiling Masterboard
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Nil Whiteboard Nil Pin-up Board Nil Others 1 no. Flag Holder outside each entrance
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Heavy Duty Magnetic Door Contacts Others Solid Door/ Outward opening Panic Bolt Lockset
(Emergency Exit) 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 4 nos. Single Gang (General usage) Lighting (Lux) 300 (Working Zone and Firer’s Zone) Fans 4 nos. of Wall Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 to 2.3)
1 no. Telephone Point Water Supply Nil Others 1 no. “Firing in Progress” Lighting Sign Box to
each entrance/ exit to range
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 ARMOURY ANCILLARY 5.14-1
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
AREA 20 m2 Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY 1 Staff
160 Rifles for Practices (Open Rack)
48 Rifles for Competition (Closed Rack)
FUNCTION Storage of air rifles and pellets
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Preferably interconnected with Rifle Range
Near NPCC/NCC Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES Strobe light cum siren box should be mounted outside the Armoury wall visible from main road or access road
No overhead pipes/ other services should cross inside the Armoury room
OTHERS Door to meet ISD requirements
Door to swing inwards and fitted with padlock bar Hercules Chubb
Ventilation grilles for openings in walls to be 25mm diameter thick
Mild Steel bars spaced at 50mm centre to centre
Ventilation opening should not exceed 200mm in height
For Armoury within Rifle Range, the door should be protected with separate timber framed door with acoustic panel
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 ARMOURY
FINISHES
Floor Concrete Topping Wall At least one block thick wall or concrete wall
with emulsion paint finish Ceiling Separate concrete ceiling by itself with
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Masterkey Set B (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Control Panel/Infra Red Sensor Detector/ Heavy
Duty Magnetic Door Contact Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
6mm thick MS Door/ Chubbs Battleship 1K11 Close Shackled padlocks
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. Single Gang Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Wall Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply Nil Others Security light to be provided at entrance
1 no. Dehumidifier
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 ARMOURY 5.14-2 ANCILLARY
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF ARMOURY
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 ARMOURY ANCILLARY 5.14-3
PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM
PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
DENTAL CLINICVOL.
3ANCILLARY 5.15-1
NO. OF UNITS As required
AREA 42 m2
CAPACITY 2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist
2 Students
FUNCTION For carrying out dental health services
LOCATION/PROXIMITY On 1st storey
Away from Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles
Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop
Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D)
Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle
Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser
Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass panel but to have 1 adjustable shelf within
SERVICES Compressor Compartment:
a. shall have a clear height of 2200mm b. light switch shall be located outside the
compartment for easy reach c. control switch to the compressor shall be
located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic
d. Door to compartment to be 1.15m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset
e. shall have 1 light fitting
Dental Unit:
a. The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter
b. Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs
c. Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit
d. Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator
Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch.
DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Windows shall be sliding type with top hung. No fixed glass windows are allowed
FITMENT/FURNITURE Curtain Blinds (Dental Clinic) Whiteboard 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic Pin-up Board Nil Projection Screen Nil Cabinets (See Vol. 4 – 1.4)
Long Cabinet with Sinks High Cabinet
Others Waiting Bench Worktable
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others Grilles to all Windows and Vents
Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports 5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no.
for each Dental chair) Power Points 6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental
Clinic) 1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment)
Lighting (Lux) See critical information for details Fans Nil Air-Conditioning A/C to be provided with Isolator Communications 2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable
PA System (See Vol. 4 – 2.3) Water Supply 3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic) Others Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
DENTAL CLINIC
VOL.
3ANCILLARY 5.15-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Dental Units
2. Long Cabinet with Sinks
3. Worktable
4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser
5. Space for Autoclave
6. Waiting Area
7. High Cabinet
8. Waiting Bench
9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard
WSC Water Stop Cock
PTD Paper Towel Dispenser
SD Soap Dispenser
REV-00 / FEB 06
DENTAL CLINICVOL.
3ANCILLARY 5.15-3
LEGEND 1. Drain Connection
40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100
2. Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply
3. Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment)
4. Suction Control Cable 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor
5. Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination
6. Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 – 6 bar 5 Microns water filtration (if possible)
7. Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer
TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT
6 Services & Circulation
6.1
Toilets
6.2 LAN Room
6.3
Central Server Room
6.4 FAVE Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 6.1-1
VOL.
3 TOILETS
NO. OF UNITS As required
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT
AREA As required
CAPACITY For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin
For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins
If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female.
The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students.
A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.
FUNCTION Showering, changing, toilets needs
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets.
Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas.
Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area.
Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet.
Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block.
4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
FITMENT /FURNITURE The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality.
All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students.
At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.
FINISHES
Floor Non-Slip Tiles Wall Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only Ceiling Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FITMENT/FURNITURE Soap Dispenser 1 no. for every two basins Cleansing Tap 1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet
cubicle
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 – 1.2)
Security System Nil Others Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer
Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan
Lighting (Lux) 300 Fans 1 no. Wall Mounted Air-Conditioning Nil Communications Nil Water Supply 1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle Others 13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets
Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet. 1 no. Electric Hand Dryer Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles 7 nos. Water Coolers
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 6.1-2
VOL.
3 TOILETS
FITMENT /FURNITURE (CON’T) Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter.
Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble.
All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing.
Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing.
Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly.
Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles.
Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle.
Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.
SERVICES Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level.
Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans.
Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas.
Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source.
Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets.
Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet.
Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials.
Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height.
Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle.
Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS
PEDESTAL TYPE
SQUAT PAN TYPE
URINAL
WASH BASIN
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 LAN ROOM SERVICES &
CIRCULATION 6.2-1
NO. OF UNITS As required
AREA 7.5 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION --
LOCATION/PROXIMITY Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES FCU = 2
Heatload = 3.9KW
Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW
Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC
R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors
Room height to be min. 2.7m
Max. weight allowed: 1,500kg
No windows allowed
No viewing panel on door
No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room
All openings to be sealed or airtight
To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening
Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point
For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Wall Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with
Insulation on Inner Wall Ceiling Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
FITMENT/FURNITURE Racks (by others) 3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer)
2 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Water Supply Nil Others Heat and Smoke detectors
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3 LAN ROOM 6.2-2 SERVICES & CIRCULATION
LEGEND
1. Rack
2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level)
3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level)
4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION
6.3-1
VOL.
3 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
NO. OF UNITS 1 No.
AREA Min. 12.6 m2
CAPACITY --
FUNCTION --
LOCATION /PROXIMITY Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office
Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room
FITMENT/FURNITURE --
SERVICES FCU = 4
Heat Load = 9KW
Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW
Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC
R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (min. internal clearance)
Room height to be min. 2.7m
Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg
No window allowed
No viewing panel allowed on door
No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room
All openings to be sealed or airtight
To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening
Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point
For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
FINISHES
Floor Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Wall Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with
Insulation on Inner Wall Ceiling Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
FITMENT/FURNITURE Rack 5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high
SAFETY/SECURITY Master Key Individual Key (See Vol. 4 – 1.2) Security System Burglar Alarm Others 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT Computer Ports Nil Power Points 5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer)
4 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC)
Lighting (Lux) 500 Fans Nil Air-Conditioning 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided Communications PA System (See Vol. 4 –2.3)
2 nos. of Telephone Points Water Supply Nil Others Heat and Smoke Detector
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 6.3-2
VOL.
3 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
LEGEND
1. Rack
2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level)
3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level)
4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
SERVICES & CIRCULATION 6.4-1
VOL.
3 FAVE AREA
AREA
10% of school’s circulation area (approximately 1110 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.
LOCATION
Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.
FUNCTION
To provide space for school’s future expansion or modification of existing facilities.
Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.
OTHERS
If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 38 nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Before expansion
Corridor
Study CornerStaircase Room Space
Room Space “FAVE”
space
Corridor
Staircase Room Space
Study Corner “optimized”
After expansion
7 External Works
7.1
Carpark, Driveway & Porch
7.2 Field, Fence & Footbath
7.3
Play Courts & Parade Square
7.4 Outdoor Fitness Area
7.5
Gates & Signwall
7.6 Guard Post
REV-00 / FEB 06
EXTERNAL WORKS 7.1-1
VOL
3 CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL NO. OF UNITS
As required.
To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.
Carpark Lots 40 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m Motorcycle Lots 6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m
REV-00 / FEB 06
EXTERNAL WORKS 7.1-2
VOL.
3 CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY
SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.2-1
VOL.
3 FIELD, FENCE &
FOOTBATHEXTERNAL WORKS
NO. OF UNITS 1 no.
FIELD SIZE Size of Field for Non-Competition: 90.0m x 60.0m or 0.54 ha Buffer: 5.0m at the end of field and 3.0m at the sides Overall size with buffers: 100.0m x 66.0m or 0.66 ha
Size of Field for Competition: 100.0m x 60.0m or 0.66 ha Buffer: 5.0m all round the field Overall size with buffers: 110.0m x 70.0m or 0.77 ha
FIELD ORIENTATION Ideally North-South
Maximum deviation: 45° to North-South axis
HIGH FENCE A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions:
Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4
At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located
Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road
If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15° or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope
A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m
DRAINAGE Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building
Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement
To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field
Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works for the field.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL
FINISHES
Fence Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted
Sub-Soil Drain To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer
GATES
Field Gates 2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field
Side Gates 1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field
Exit Gates 2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard “Emergency Exit Only” at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principal’s request.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Others 2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.2-2
VOL.
3 FIELD, FENCE & FOOTBATH
EXTERNAL WORKS
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SECONDARY SCHOOL FIELD *Size of School Field for Competitions
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.2-3
VOL.
3 FIELD, FENCE &
FOOTBATHEXTERNAL WORKS
PLAN OF FOOTBATH SECTION A-A
ELEVATION 1 PLAN OF G.S GRATING SECTION B-B
SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.2-4
VOL.
3 FIELD, FENCE & FOOTBATH
EXTERNAL WORKS
CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE
Front Elevation
Side Elevation
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-1
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
NO. OF UNITS Play Courts – 2 nos. Parade Square – 1 no.
LOCATION To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways
Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint
NETBALL COURT Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts
ALL COURTS Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts
Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court
Avoid planting tall trees near courts
Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level
All lines to be 50mm wide
Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts
PARADE SQUARE Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m
Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square
A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square
Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL
FINISHES & PROVISIONS
Basketball Backboard Support of Galvanized Steel & Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’
Volleyball/Sepak Takraw
Galvanized Steel Post & Painted Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with ‘Fast Borundico’
Netball Court Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated with the Parade Square)
Parade Square Interlocking Pavers
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-2
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
NETBALL GOAL POST
NETBALL COURT (TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)
Elevation
Goal Ring
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-3
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
Front Elevation Side Elevation
BASKETBALL POST
BASKETBALL COURT
See Detail A
DETAIL A
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-4
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
REV-01 / 16 APR 04
LONG-JUMP / TRIPLE JUMP PIT
SEPAK TAKRAW COURT (TO BE DRAWN ON NETBALL COURT IF REQUESTED BY USER)
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-5
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
REV-00 / 28 JAN 04
VOLLEYBALL COURT (COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )
DETAIL B
DETAIL A
See Detail B
See Detail A
VOLLEYBALL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-6
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.3-7
VOL.
3 PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE
EXTERNAL WORKS
PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM
SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.4-1
VOL.
3 OUTDOOR FITNESS AREAEXTERNAL WORKS
AREA 200 m2. or 40m X 5m
LOCATION Area to be located free from underground services
OTHERS School principal to select 10 out of 12 fitness equipment
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Press-up Logs
Window
Climbing Ropes
Horizontal Ladder
Step Up Blocks (5 Steps)
Inclined Flexed Arm Hang
Pull-up Bars Wall with Sand Pit
Sit-up Bench (4 pieces) Leg Raise
Parallel Bars Swing Bridge
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.5-1
VOL.
3 GATES & SIGNWALLEXTERNAL WORKS
MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE Open inwards
Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes)
1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves
Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy
Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm
SIGNWALL School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:
Malay
Chinese
Tamil
English
School crest to be provided
School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above 1st storey
OTHERS To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school
This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis
Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
Plan
Plan
Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION
Elevation SIDE GATE
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.5-2
VOL.
3 GATES & SIGNWALL EXTERNAL WORKS
SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL
SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
7.6-1
VOL.
3 GUARD POSTOTHER FACILITIES
AREA Max. 4sqm CAPACITY 2 security officers
FUNCTION To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates;
To log in visitor’s particulars and issue entry passes;
To monitor activities on CCTV screen
LOCATION / PROXIMITY To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors
FITMENT / FURNITURE Minimal provision
Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors’ enquiry
SERVICES Lighting and power points as required to be provided Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate Connection to school’s CCTV network to be provided
Criti
cal I
nfor
mat
ion
OTHERS Guard post design should not be opulent.
Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft
Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security
Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required
Exterior view GUARD POST
Interior of GUARD POST
Master Revision List
Index
Master Revision List Design Handbook Vol. 3 – Secondary School
S/ No.
Page No. Revision No.
Circular No. / Circular Date
Amendment
1. 1.1-1 01 03/2006 (May 06)
Critical Info>Others – Amended page reference - Proper distribution of M&E services Recommended Provisions>Finishes – Amended type of Floor Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of “Security Key System” - Renamed “Alarm System”
Critical info>Location/Proximity – Amended “Technical” Critical info>Fitment/Furniture - Insert “flag holder” details Critical info>Others - Insert “back wall” details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Wall - Relocated detail of back wall to Critical Info column Fitment/Furniture>Others - Relocated detail of flag holder to Critical Info column
SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK EDITION 2006
Vol. 4
Produced by Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying needs and expectations of school educators and students alike. Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important models of inspiration for our young. Schools’ physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable. The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition. As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
School Design Handbook Vol. 4
> TECHNICAL <
CONTENTS Introduction
1 Architectural 1.1 Zoning & Layout 1.2 Building Design 1.3 Building Finishes 1.4 Fitment & Furniture
3 Other Provisions 3.1 Design Exclusions 3.2 External Works 3.3 Upgrading Works 3.4 Project Signboard 3.5 Hoarding Design
4 Appendices 4.1 Specifications for CCTV System Master Revision List Index
REV 00 - FEB 06
Introduction
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 INTRODUCTION
Introduction
1.1 This Volume consolidates information on architectural, engineering and other technical requirements that apply to school design and building. The information is provided according to what are deemed current and best practices in the school building industry and what are considered relevant to MOE schools.
1.2 This Volume is to be read in conjunction with Volumes 1, 2 and 3 of the School Design Handbook. The context of each provision herein is related to the general information and facilities requirements laid in Volumes 1, 2 and 3.
1.3 All technical information in this Volume serve only as a guide to Consultants and highlight the more crucial aspects of the architectural, civil & structural, mechanical and electrical provisions and other building practices.
1.4 Consultants are encouraged to comply with them and make necessary modifications as they deem fit if the stipulations do not apply to a particular school. Consultants shall seek the approval of MOE and the school for their intended proposals when deviations or modifications are made to the requirements.
1 Architectural
1.1
Zoning & Layout
1.2 Building Design
1.3
Building Finishes
1.4 Fitment & Furniture
REV-00 / FEB 06
ZONING & LAYOUTVOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.1-1
Zoning and Layout
1.1 Classroom blocks are to be located in quieter areas of the site. Noisy activity areas such as canteen, parade square, courts and field must be placed away from classrooms.
Site factors to be
considered
1.2 Non-air-conditioned teaching spaces, especially classrooms, should not be physically enclosed or obstructed by other blocks like stair cores, toilets, etc to ensure good cross ventilation.
Non-airconditioned facilities
1.3 Non-air-conditioned teaching blocks facing each other shall have spacing distance of at least 18m between them. Blocks with corridors facing each other shall have spacing distance of minimum 16m between them, as shown in Diagram 1-A.
1.4 Rooms with equipment or materials requiring security are to be easily cordoned off at controlled points by roller shutters.
High Security Areas
1.5 The Staff Room and Media Resource Library (MRL) should not be on more than one level, where possible.
1.6 CCA Rooms and Health & Fitness Rooms are to be directly accessible from outside the cordoned or secured areas. This is to enable better security management after school hours.
1.7 Bin Center shall be located away from the school’s main entrance. Importantly, it should not be located next to pedestrian walkway or residential houses. It should be in close proximity to the Canteen, preferably behind the Canteen. It should have a proper pathway leading to it.
Services Areas
1.8 Substation location shall be accessible from public roads, but must not cause the school frontage to be reduced. It should preferably be located where it is not likely to be affected by future extensions.
1.9 Toilets with showers for students shall be located near the School Field or Canteen.
1.10 In designing for vehicular circulation, pedestrian safety must be given utmost consideration. Movement of school buses must especially be controlled.
Vehicular Circulation
ZONING & LAYOUT VOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.1-2
External Works
1.11 Separate entry and exit points for vehicles (i.e. 2 gates) are to be provided if site condition permits.
1.12 External facilities like School Field and Games Courts are to be located away from the main driveway for safety reasons. If this is not possible, a physical barrier (such as planting, fencing etc) shall be provided.
Diagram 1-A
SPACING BETWEEN NON-AIR-CONDITIONED TEACHING BLOCKS
REV-00 / FEB 06
ZONING & LAYOUTVOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.1-3
Setback & Spacing Requirements
1.13 When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances have to be observed.
1.14 From Teaching block to site boundary where :
HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-B) Setback = 6m
Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-B) Setback = 15m
School blocks to site boundary
1.15 From Non-Teaching and air-conditioned block to site boundary where :
HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-C) Setback = 6m
Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-C) Setback = 10m
1.16 Major road (Arterial A & Expressway) abutting school sites are acceptable if the school field can be used as a buffer.
From Field to Fence (See Diagram 1-D) 1.17 Setback = 3m Field setbacks
From Field to Games Courts (See Diagram 1-D) 1.18 Setback = 3m
1.19 From Field / Games Courts to building (See Diagram 1-D)
Setback = 10m
1.20 When 2 school sites are adjacent to one another, place each school’s parade square away from each other to avoid interference during morning assembly.
1.21 To group noisy areas such as Canteen, Field and Games Courts together.
REV-01 / MAY 06
SITE PLANNINGVOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.1-4
Diagram 1-B
SETBACKS FROM TEACHING BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS
Diagram 1-C
SETBACKS FROM NON-TEACHING & AIR-CON BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS
Diagram 1-D
SETBACKS BETWEEN SCHOOL BUILDING, FIELD AND COURTS
REV-00 / FEB 06
ZONING & LAYOUTVOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.1-5
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY
1.22 Spaces in the school building must be designed without hidden corners or corridors. This is to facilitate visual supervision at all times.
No hidden corners
1.23 Toilets, especially female toilets, shall not be remotely located and must be easily accessible from teaching facilities.
No remote locations
1.24 The upper levels of the school building shall be made secure after school hours by providing controlled access points at the ground level.
Controlled access at
ground level
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGNARCHITECTURAL 1.2-1
VOL.
4
Roof, Walls, Floors and Other Elements
2.1 Roof Profiles shall be simple.
2.2 All roofs are to be accessible for maintenance.
2.3 The roof shall have low reflectivity and luminance so the neighbouring buildings’ occupants will not be subject to glare or blinding reflection.
2.4 The roof shall have appropriate noise-damping provision and proper insulation to ensure that the noise of rain tapping on the roof is not deflected onto neighbouring buildings’ occupants.
2.5 The ground beneath all roof eaves shall be provided with a 1.2m wide pavement, to minimize the physical impact caused by splashing rainwater from the roofs.
2.6 All corridors and stairs must be sufficiently protected from rain with weather protection devices.
2.7 All corridors and staircases shall be adequately ventilated and well-lit. Double-loaded corridors are not allowed.
2.8 Corridor railings are to be 50% pre-cast concrete and/or 50% perforated aluminium or steel railings.
2.9 Weather protection devices are to be lightweight and pre-fabricated. Their parts must be vandal-proof and not easily tampered with. It shall be sturdy such that it would not shake or wobble.
2.10 The weather protection device should be vertically installed or inclined to prevent students from climbing onto them.
2.11 The weather protection device shall be designed to provide continuous protection, i.e., without gaps at intervals that would enable rainwater or sunlight entry. The material and design shall generate minimum noise when the rain falls on the devices.
2.12 Hollow core slabs shall not be used in wet floor areas.
2.13 Falls and scupper drains are to be provided where necessary, e.g. along corridors.
Roof
Corridors / Stairs
Weather Protection Device
Floors
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGN ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-2
VOL.
4
2.14 Drywall partitions shall not be provided in rooms which have wet areas or with critical security considerations. Dry wall partition or box-ups shall not be installed along high human traffic areas e.g. corridors.
2.15 All drywall partitions shall be impact-resistant.
2.16 Sliding folding acoustic wall partitions shall be manually operable. The surface shall be completely flat, with no protrusion or recess. Both sides of the partition panels shall serve as pin up boards.
2.17 Sound level transmitted through the partition, when completely closed, shall be equal or lower than sound level transmitted through a normal dry wall partition.
2.18 Windows shall be anodised aluminium finish.
2.19 Sliding windows are recommended for air-conditioned rooms. Louvred windows are preferred for non-air-conditioned rooms, especially for windows opening into circulation areas.
2.20 Windows should not protrude into common circulation areas.
2.21 Vents or windows shall be provided on two opposite-facing walls of the classrooms. The amount of opening shall be sufficient to enable maximum cross ventilation within the classroom.
2.22 The vents and windows shall be easy to maintain and their handles shall be easily accessed by the users.
2.23 The use of architectural glass should be minimized.
2.24 Full height windows are not allowed.
2.25 Doors that are likely to come in contact with water shall be constructed in marine plywood or anodized aluminum.
2.26 Door trims should be hardy to receive the required locksets and withstand the occasional accidental slamming.
Drywall Partitions
Sliding Folding Partitions
Windows
Doors
REV-01 / MAY 06
BUILDING DESIGNARCHITECTURAL 1.2-3
2.27 Types of door handles, stoppers/ catchers shall be chosen carefully and their locations appropriately considered so as not to pose a hazard to passersby.
2.28 A covered linkway connecting the school building to the boundary gate nearest the public bus-stop is to be provided.
The following are guidelines on how to address Vision Care in facility design:
2.29 Non-air-conditioned rooms shall be orientated with their windows facing the North-South direction. This is to ensure that the whiteboard receives minimum glare from the incoming sunlight.
2.30 Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the exterior.
2.31 The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall not have windows or openings that would allow light to infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface.
2.32 Whiteboard shall be tilted forward by 1 to 2 degrees.
2.33 Whiteboard surface shall be of a non-glossy, matt finish.
2.34 Proper lighting for vision care shall comply with specifications under Vol. 4, Chapter 2.3.
2.35 Maximum viewing angle for the projection screen in rooms with LCD projector is 60 degrees, as shown in Diagram 2-A.
2.36 The maximum viewing distance from the whiteboard to the last row of students’ seats shall be 12.5m.
2.37 Layout of room to address vision care is to be complied with as shown in Diagram 2-B.
Covered Linkway
Designing for Vision Care
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGN ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-4
VOL.
4
Diagram 2-A.
RECOMMENDED VIEWING ANGLES FROM STUDENTS’ SEATING AREA
Diagram 2-B.
VISION CARE LAYOUT IN A TYPICAL CLASSROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGNARCHITECTURAL 1.2-5
VOL.
4
State Flag and Signage
2.38 The State Flag shall be placed on the front wall of the classroom, high above a standing person’s head and above all other decoration. No emblem of any kind shall be above the flag.
2.39 State Flag to all classrooms shall comply with the specification as follows:
Design - Use artwork provided by MICA
Material - Transparent Acrylic
Printing - Silkscreen Printing (Reverse)
Size - 460mm x 690mm x 3mm with bevelled edges
Finishing - Glossy, backing with approved protection
Colour - Pantone Red (032) or Sunflower Red
2.40
State Flag
Signage provision shall comprise room numbering and naming system to all rooms and facilities, including Canteen Stalls, Toilets and Services Rooms and compartments.
2.41
Signage locations
Information and directional signs shall be provided to staircases and lift lobbies at all levels.
2.42 Floor loading plan (6 colours per sign) shall be provided at every storey.
2.43 Acrylic holder to hold card of 100mm height shall be provided to every classroom.
2.44 Signage to rooms and facilities shall be in Acrylic block cut-outs.
2.45 Signage on glass panels and doors shall be vinyl self-adhesive type.
2.46 Signage to external areas like building block, entrance sign-wall shall be in aluminium box lettering.
2.47 Road traffic signs (1 no. each) bearing "NO ENTRY" and "STOP" including galvanized post and concrete foundation are to be provided.
Traffic Signs
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGN ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-6
VOL.
4 2.48 Traffic directional signs (2 nos.) bearing school name informing
road users of direction to school are to be provided, as shown in Diagram 2-C.
2.49 All approvals from appropriate authorities are to be obtained for design and installation of traffic directional signs.
2.50 Entrance sign wall is to be designed incorporating the requirements stated in Vol. 2 - 6.5.
2.51
Entrance Sign Wall
Signage lettering shall be anodised aluminium box letterings of School Name in four official languages. Height of lettering should not be more than 200mm.
2.52 School Crest shall be installed at the school’s entrance wall and at the front of the stage in the Hall.
School Crest
2.53 School Crest is to be of coloured fluorocarbon aluminium sheet, with different layers of aluminium sheet to denote different colours. Crest size shall not exceed 1m for entrance wall and 1.2m for Hall stage.
Diagram 2-C
SAMPLE OF TRAFFIC DIRECTIONAL SIGN
Note:
Text height and arrow size to be provided in accordance to LTA Specification and approval. Text and signage to be double sided.
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGNARCHITECTURAL 1.2-7
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY
2.54 Handrails to both sides of staircases shall be at a height between 580mm to 700mm for primary schools. The handrails must have returns.
Railings
2.55 Railings / Parapets along corridors and staircase landings are to be provided at 1100mm above FFL.
2.56 Railing design must discourage students from climbing onto them.
2.57 Staircases shall have a width of 1.5m for safe mass movement of students. For staircases wider than 1.5m, additional handrail shall be provided in the middle of the stair width.
Staircases
2.58 Staircases shall have uniform risers of 150mm (max) and treads of 300mm (min), and fitted with non-slip nosing in permanent contrasting colours.
2.59 Roof access shall be secure and vandal proof.
2.60 Corridors shall have minimum width of 2.1m to accommodate mass movement of students.
Corridors
2.61 Ramps, instead of steps, are to be provided for changes in levels at corridors and high traffic areas.
2.62 Corridors shall be laid to fall towards scuppers or floor traps to facilitate proper rainwater drainage and to prevent accidental falls.
2.63 Obstruction and protrusions such as fire extinguishers, water coolers, window and door swings into corridors must be avoided completely.
2.64 Doors that swing out into circulation areas shall preferably be recessed and door leaves shall not protrude into the corridor when opened so as not to pose danger and injury to passersby.
Doors
2.65 Doors to air-conditioned rooms are to be provided with door closers and vision panels.
2.66 Door handles shall be free of sharp edges.
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGN ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-8
Requirements on Safety & Security (con’t)
2.67 Timber doors at 1st storey shall be in solid timber for greater security.
2.68 The key and locking systems to doors shall follow the Masterkey groupings as recommended in Table 2-D.
2.69 Glass doors shall have warning bands to prevent accidental crashes.
2.70 Security grilles shall be provided to all windows and vents at 1st storey except for Counselling room, Pastoral Care Room, Canteen’s Foodstalls and Stores and Non-Teaching Staff room.
Security Grilles
2.71 Security grilles shall be provided to sliding, casement, or top hung windows that face the external at the upper stories, except in air-conditioned rooms where the windows are normally closed.
2.72 Security grilles shall be provided to service areas and flat roofs to prevent unauthorized access.
2.73 Window grille members spacing shall not exceed 150mm.
2.74 Roller shutters are to be provided at the entrances to the General Office, Media Resource Library, Staff Room and H.O.D’s Room.
Roller Shutters
2.75 Roller shutters are to be provided at the 1st storey to every staircase.
2.76 The use of cantilever structure for linkways, bus shelters and entrance porches is discouraged.
Cantilever Design
2.77 For all games courts except Netball Court, the goalposts are to be fixed to the ground. For safety reasons, schools are not allowed to change this provision to portable type even if the schools funded it.
Goalposts
2.78 If the games courts must double up as a fire engine access, the goalposts shall not be in the path of the fire engine access.
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGNARCHITECTURAL 1.2-9
Requirements on Safety & Security (con’t)
2.79 The Science Room shall preferably be located on the ground floor to enable quick evacuation in time of emergency.
Science Room
2.80 The Canteen and Field may be used for assembly during an emergency. Public Address System is needed at the Canteen and Field for the school’s management to give directions guiding the students to move to safety. Horn speakers are also required for the Field.
Emergency Planning
2.81 Sufficient gates are to be provided along the fence surrounding the Field for discharging the students during an emergency. They are to be located near the HDB void decks or safe open space. The location could be relocated upon the Principal’s request.
2.82 The following shall be provided:
Canteen - 1 microphone point and intercom system
Field - 1 microphone point and 2 horn speakers
- 2 internal gate (2.4m) between the Field and school compound
- 1 side gate (1.2m) for community use
- 2 exit gates (1.2m) each with ‘Emergency Exit Only’ sign on both sides along the fence
2.83 The types and quantities of fire safety equipment shown in Volumes 2 and 3 are to be provided to serve as provisions on top of the standard statutory requirements.
Safety Equipment
2.84 During an emergency, all students may be required to remain indoors in rooms that have been designated by the school for in-place protection, e.g. Classrooms. All windows, doors and vents to the rooms are to be closed and sealed with plastic sheets against the migration of harmful vapours. The designated rooms shall comply with the following criteria:
In-place protection
Have flat-surfaced frames to windows, doors and vents to facilitate easy sealing with masking tapes.
Gaps around M&E services penetrations shall be sealed with appropriate materials to prevent gas seepage.
Large enough to provide a comfortable stay and an acceptable air quality for its occupants.
Should be easily accessible with doors that are lockable from both inside and outside.
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING DESIGN ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-10
Table 2-D : Masterkey Groupings
The following are the recommended key groupings for the facilities found in both primary and secondary schools.
Facility Type Masterkey Grouping General Teaching 1 Classroom - - C 2 Learning Support Co-ordinator’s Room - - C 3 Mother Tongue Language Room - B - Special Teaching Rooms 4 All - B - Design & Technology Rooms 5 All D - - Administrative and Staff Areas 6 All 7 Counselling Room 8 Prefect’s Room 9 Career Guidance Room
A - -
Ancillary 10 Media Resource Library - B - 11 Multi-Purpose Hall
a. Seating Area & Stage b. Control Room c. Changing Room d. Store
A
-
-
12 Furniture Store A - - 13 Canteen A - - 14 Non-Teaching Staff Room A - - 15 Health & Fitness Room - B - 16 Games Equipment Store A - - 17 CCA Room - B - 18 Bookshop Individual key 19 Sickbay A - - 20 Dental Clinic A - - 21 Pastoral Care Room A - - 22 NCC/NPCC Room - B - 23 Rifle Range (Indoor) Individual Key 24 Rifle Range (Outdoor) Individual Key 25 Armoury - B - Services Areas 26 Toilets & Showers Key Alike to all Toilets 27 LAN Room Individual key 28 Central Server Room Individual key
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ARCHITECTURAL
1.3-1 BUILDING FINISHES
VOL.
4
3.0 Building Finishes
3.1 The colour, density, water absorption and abrasion resistance of all wall finishes shall be carefully chosen especially when they are to be applied to wet facilities or areas that are exposed to water. This is to slow down the onset of mould and to ease cleaning.
3.2 The type of paint selected for the lower half of corridor walls shall be easy to maintain, as these wall areas are prone to stains and marks.
3.3 Backsplash panels must be provided to wall areas that are prone to dampness due to the presence of washing facilities, water coolers or any other water dispensers.
3.4 Ground level floor finishes that are adhesive bonded shall take into account the rising dampness that may de-bond the finishing.
3.5 Vinyl sport flooring shall be heavy duty to withstand equipment load and accidental weights dropped on the floor.
3.6 Vinyl flooring in computer rooms shall be heavy-duty anti-static type.
3.7 Warranty shall be provided for vinyl flooring.
3.8 Where applicable, concrete topping shall be used in place of cement sand screed.
3.9 Suspended ceilings are to be provided to all areas at the upper most storeys (with exception to areas with flat roofs) and all special rooms with ceiling requirements.
3.10 All rooms specified with ceiling shall be provided with non-acoustic ceiling boards of regular material (e.g mineral fibre or gypsum) except facilities such as Hall.
3.11 Access openings shall be provided in ceilings to facilitate periodic inspections. Installation requirements for the ceiling system are to be adequately provided for.
Wall Finishes
Floor Finishes
Suspended Ceiling
REV-00 / FEB 06
BUILDING FINISHES VOL.
4 ARCHITECTURAL
1.3-2
3.12 Rooms with false ceiling, which are equipped with projector screen and/or ceiling fans, shall have minimum floor to ceiling clear height of 2.8m.
Requirements on Safety & Security
3.13 Floor materials selected for wet areas shall be slip-resistant to prevent accidental falls.
Floor finish
3.14 All design and fixing detail drawings of proposed ceiling systems by the Contractor’s relevant qualified persons shall, before installation, be cleared by the Consultant.
Suspended Ceiling System
3.15 Mock-ups of 2800mm by 2400mm ceiling grid with fixings and accessories shall be inspected and its design submitted for the Superintendent Officer’s (S.O.) approval.
3.16 Prior to installation of the ceiling, the Consultant shall brief the site supervisor on the inspections required for the system and make checks on other system components like M&E fixtures to ascertain that these are independent of the suspended ceiling system.
3.17 A checklist shall be prepared by the S.O. to ascertain that the various fixings and accessories have been inspected for safety during supervision.
3.18 The range of tests conducted before and after installation shall also be recorded in the checklist. This checklist is to be filed on site and made available for verification and inspection when necessary.
3.19 The checklist shall be duly signed by the Clerk-Of-Works (COW) and submitted to the S.O.’s representatives to acknowledge that 100% check has been conducted.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-1
4.0 Fitment Design
The following section recommends the types of fitment that can be provided for schools according to the teaching and learning needs within the facility as well as the storage requirements.
Samples of fitment prototypes are illustrated for indicative purposes only. Consultants are to consult the school and MOE on the actual design and quantity of fitment required for each particular facility. Consultants shall also comply with the criteria on fitment design as laid down below:
4.1 Where electrical and IT provisions are to be incorporated into the fitment design, easy access to these points shall be provided. They shall also be visible and not hidden from view.
4.2 Workbenches that serve as computer or writing stations shall be provided with sufficient knee clearance.
4.3 Worktops that are meant to carry machinery shall be made of heavy duty material. Those with sink incorporated in them shall be made of non-porous, solid surfacing material.
4.4 All fitment located in areas with wet facilities shall be provided with a concrete base with tile finish.
4.5 The whiteboard shall be inclusive of a pen tray, rounded-off at its edges, and installed with its bottom edge at 700mm (for PS) or 850mm (for SS) above the floor level.
4.6 Vision care needs for whiteboards as outlined under Vol. 1 & 4 shall be addressed.
4.7 Cabinets and its components (swing doors, drawers, sliding doors, glass sliding doors, etc.) are to be provided with locks. Locks with removable key type when locked or unlocked are to be provided.
4.8 All fitment shall be designed and installed to cater for students of an average height. For installation of particular fitments e.g. wash basin, urinals, pedestal toilet, canteen stall counters, canteen wash troughs etc, the height of lower primary or shorter than average students must be taken into account.
Electrical & IT points within easy
access
Heavy duty worktops for machinery
Tiled concrete base for fitment
in wet areas
Whiteboard
Cabinet Locks
Height of fitments
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-2
FITMENT PROTOTYPES (COMMON TO PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS)
TYPE 4-1 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD
- Whiteboards are sliding and tilted forward 1 to 2 degrees from vertical plane.
- Shelves are adjustable
- LAN points/power points are integrated, with at least one each at both ends of the cabinet.
Locations:
Mother Tongue Language Room
Mathematics Room
Art and Crafts Room
Audio Visual Room
Science Room
Computer Room
IT Learning Resource Room
Humanities Room Commerce Room
Music Room
Sample Elevation and Sections of High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
Pen Tray Detail
Type 4-1
AB
B
Elevation
A
Section A Section B
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-3
TYPE 4-2 : WORKTOP WITH HIGH CABINETS
- This fitment has 4 variations that can be combined.
Locations:
Learning Support Coordinator’s Room
Art & Crafts Room
Science Room
Staff Resource Room
Preparation Room/Store
Type 4-2
4-2A (High Cabinet with Cupboard) 4-2B (High Cabinet with Drawers)
4-2C (High Cabinet with Knee Space) 4-2D (High Cabinet with Sink)
Typical Section
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-4
TYPE 4-3 : LOW CABINET
- This fitment has 4 variations that can be combined.
Locations:
Learning Support Coordinator’s Room
Science Room
Meeting Room
Counselling Room
Staff Lounge
Staff Resource Room
Pastoral Care Room
Health & Fitness Room
Art & Crafts Room
Kitchen Preparation Room
Type 4-3
4-3A (Low Cabinet with Cupboard)
Typical Section
4-3B (Low Cabinet with Drawers)
Typical Section
4-3C (Low Cabinet with Sink)
Typical Section
4-3D (Low Cabinet with Open Shelves)
Typical Section
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-5
TYPE 4-4 : TRAPEZOIDAL TABLE
- The table comes in different sizes.
Location:
Mathematics Room
Art and Crafts Room Type 4-4
Science Room
IT Learning Resource Room (with port holes)
Media Resource Library
Pastoral Care Room.
TYPE 4-5 : HIGH CABINET
Location:
Type 4-5 General Office
Games Equipment Room
Dental Clinic
Kitchen Preparation Room Non-Teaching Staff Room
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-6
TYPE 4-6 : STAFF WORKSTATION
- Each workstation shall be provided with 1 no. service outlet box each with 1 no. twin gang 13A power point and 1 no. computer point.
Location:
H.O.Ds’ Office
General Office
Staffroom
Type 4-6
4-6A (HOD, AM, OM) (8m2) 4-6B (Staff Room) (4m2)
Legend
1. 1 set of Modular Partition
2. Main Table
3. Side Table
4. 1 set of Overhead Storage Units
5. 1 set Pedestal Drawers
6. Metal Cabinet
7. Chairs
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-7
TYPE 4-7 : DISPLAY CABINET
- Glass doors on upper for display
- Low cabinet / worktop
Location:
Kitchen
Kitchen Preparation Room
Needlework Room
Type 4-7
Elevation Section
Location: TYPE 4-8 : OPEN SHELVES Kitchen
Needlework Room
Office Store
Audio Visual Store
Type 4-8
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-8
TYPE 4-9 : SUPPLY CABINET & FOLIO CABINET Location:
Art & Crafts Room
Type 4-9
Sample Elevation and Section of Folio Cabinet
Type 4-10
Sample Elevation and Section of Supply Cabinet
TYPE 4-11 : MUSIC RACK AND CABINETS FOR BAND INSTRUMENTS
Location:
Music Room and Music Store
Type 4-11
Sample Of Music Rack And Cabinets For Band Instruments
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-9
TYPE 4-12 : TEACHER’S TABLE Location:
Science Room
Type 4-12
Sample Elevation and Section of Teacher’s Table
TYPE 4-13 : HIGH CABINET WITH BUILT-IN SAFE Location:
Principal’s Office
Type 4-13
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Built-In Safe
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-10
TYPE 4-14 : SINGLE & DOUBLE SEAT COMPUTER TABLE Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-14A
Sample Of Single Seat Computer Table
Type 4-14B
Sample Of Double Seat Computer Table
TYPE 4-15 : TIMBER OPEN SHELVES Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-15
Sample Of Timber Open Shelves
TYPE 4-16 : MEDIA ISLAND FOR 3 TERMINALS Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-16A
Type 4-16B
Sample Plan and Section of Media Island For 3 Terminals
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-11
TYPE 4-17 : AV EQUIPMENT WORKTOP Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-17
Sample Elevation of AV Equipment Worktop
TYPE 4-18 : NON-PRINT MEDIA CABINET Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-18
Sample Elevation and Section of Non-Print Media Cabinet
TYPE 4-19 : BOOK CHUTE Location:
Media Resource Library
Type 4-19
Sample Internal Elevation and Section of Book Chute
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-12
TYPE 4-20 : DRESSING TABLE Location:
Multi-Purpose Hall Changing Room
Type 4-20
Sample Elevation of Dressing Table TYPE 4-21 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES Location:
Games Equipment Store
Type 4-21
Sample Of High Open Shelves
TYPE 4-22 : COUNTER CABINET Location:
Bookshop
Type 4-22
Sample Elevation and Section of Counter Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-13
TYPE 4-23 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES Location:
Bookshop
Type 4-23
Sample Elevation and Section of High Open Shelves
Location:
Dental Clinic
Type 4-24
TYPE 4-24 : LONG CABINET WITH SINK
Sample Elevation and Section of Long Cabinet With Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-14
TYPE 4-25 : WORKTABLE Location:
Dental Clinic
Type 4-25
Sample Elevation and Section of Dental Officers’ Worktable
TYPE 4-26 : WAITING BENCH
- For students to sit and await consultation
Location:
Dental Clinic
Type 4-26
Sample Of Waiting Bench
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-15
FITMENT PROTOTYPES (COMMON TO FACILITIES IN A SECONDARY SCHOOL)
TYPE 4-27 : HIGH CABINET FOR HUMANITIES SUBJECTS
- Storage for resource materials, charts and models.
- Transparent glass doors for display as required.
Location:
Humanities Workroom
Type 4-27
Sample Elevation of Cabinet for Humanities Workroom
TYPE 4-28 : HIGH CABINETS FOR MUSIC
- Storage for Curriculum Music and Band Instruments.
Location:
Music Store
Type 4-28A
Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Curriculum Music
Type 4-28B
Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Band Instruments
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-16
Location: TYPE 4-29 : WORK BENCHES FOR LABS
- Storage for laboratory instruments and teaching resources. Chemistry Laboratory
Type 4-29A
Sample Elevation and Section of Teacher’s Work Bench
Type 4-29B
Sample Elevation and Section of Students’ Work Bench
Type 4-29C
Sample Elevation and Section of Side Workbench With Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-17
TYPE 4-31 : MICROSCOPE CUPBOARD
- Storage of Scientific Equipment e.g. Microscopes
- Dehumidifier system as required
Location:
Biology Laboratory
Physics Laboratory
Type 4-30
Sample Elevation and Section of Microscope Cupboard
Location: TYPE 4-31: WORKBENCH CUM OVERHEAD STORAGE
- Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage
- Includes min. 1 workstation for laboratory assistant
- Worktop for preparation of experiments
- Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of instruments
Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.
Type 4-31
Sample Of Workbench Cum Overhead Storage
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-18
TYPE 4-32 : MOVABLE HIGH CABINET WITH GLASS DOORS
- Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage
- Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of instruments
Location:
Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.
Type 4-32
Sample Elevation and Section of Movable High Cabinet With Glass Doors
TYPE 4-33 : WORK BENCHES FOR KITCHEN Location:
Kitchen
Type 4-33A
Sample Of Teacher’s Demonstration Table
Type 4-33B
Sample Of Student’s Workbench
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-19
TYPE 4-34 : LOW CABINETS FOR KITCHEN Location:
Kitchen
Type 4-34A
Sample of Low Cabinet with Louvred Door
Type 4-34B
Sample Of Resource Corner Cabinet (For 1 Kitchen Only) TYPE 4-35: TEACHER’S WORKSTATION
- For preparation of lessons and teaching materials
Location: Kitchen Preparation Room/Store.
Type 4-35
Sample Of Teacher’s Workstation
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-20
TYPE 4-36: CHARTS CABINET
- Storage for subject materials like food charts etc.
Location:
Kitchen Preparation Room
Type 4-36
Sample Elevation and Section of Charts Cabinet
TYPE 4-37: HIGH CABINET FOR KITCHEN Location:
- Storage for kitchen equipment and utensils. Kitchen Preparation Room
Type 4-37
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet for Kitchen
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-21
TYPE 4-38: HIGH CABINET WITH RACK
Location:
Needlework Room
Type 4-38
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Rack
TYPE 4-39: GARMENT CABINET Location: Needlework Room
Type 4-39
Sample Elevation and Section of Garment Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-22
TYPE 4-40: WING MIRROR Location:
Needlework Room
Type 4-40
Sample Elevation and Section of Wing Mirror
Location: TYPE 4-41 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & DRAWERS
- The provision of drawers to be on one side only if the length of wall is insufficient.
D & T Studio 1 & 2
Design Room
D & T Studio (LS).
Type 4-41
Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-23
TYPE 4-42 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & SINK
- The position of sink to be near doorway so that students can wash their hands on their way out of the Studio. Sufficient standing room to be considered. Other sinks in the Studio to be centrally located to provide better access to students from various work zones.
Location:
D & T Studio 1 & 2
D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-42
Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinet and Sink
Location: TYPE 4-43 : CONCRETE COUNTER FOR SOLDERING D & T Studio 2
D & T Studio (LS).
Type 4-43
Sample Elevation and Section of Counter for Soldering
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-24
TYPE 4-44 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS Location:
D & T Design Room Store.
Type 4-44
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers
TYPE 4-45 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS Location:
D & T Design Room Store.
Type 4-45
Sample Of High Cabinet With Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-25
TYPE 4-46 : HIGH SHELVES Location:
D & T Studio Stores (Tools Stores)
Type 4-46
Sample Elevation and Section of High Shelves
Location: TYPE 4-47 : LOW CABINET WITH OPEN SHELVES D & T Studio Stores (Main Stores)
Type 4-47
Sample Elevation and Section of Low Cabinet With Open Shelves
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-26
TYPE 4-48 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS Location:
D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-48
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Drawers
TYPE 4-49 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS
Location:
D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-49
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITUREARCHITECTURAL 1.4-27
TYPE 4-50 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD AND PIN-UP BOARD Location:
D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-50
Sample Elevation of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board
Section A-A Section B-B
Sample Section of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-Up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4
FITMENT / FURNITURE ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-28
TYPE 4-51: RIFLE RACKS Location:
Armoury
Type 4-51A
Sample Elevation and Section of Enclosed Type Rifle Rack
Type 4-51B
Sample Elevation and Section of Two-Tier Open Type Rifle Rack
2 Engineering
2.1 Civil & Structural
2.2
Mechanical
2.3 Electrical
2.4
Plumbing
REV-00 / FEB 06
CIVIL & STRUCTURALENGINEERING 2.1-1
VOL.
4 1.0 Civil & Structural Works
1.1 Design of the Structural System shall comply with Building Codes as well as Buildability Requirements.
1.2 Instructional areas shall be column free.
1.3 Intermediate columns which protrude from the walls or limit future extension works shall be avoided.
1.4 School Fields shall be turfed with Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus) and grown to produce a continuous cover over the whole field. The school field shall be rolled even and properly compacted with adequate drainage system.
Instructional areas must be column-free
School Field
REV-00 / FEB 06
MECHANICALVOL.
4 ENGINEERING 2.2-1
2.0 Mechanical Systems
The following requirements for mechanical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications and obtain MOE’s approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not exhaustive. Consultants are advised to check with the MOE officer-in-charge if they require further clarifications.
2.1 The operating indoor conditions shall be 240C ± 10C & 65% RH ± 5% unless otherwise noted. The operating conditions for Computer Rooms, LAN and Central Server Room shall be 230C ± 10C & 60% RH ± 5%.
2.2 Noise level: NR 40 in Library, Computer Rooms, Offices, Music Rooms, AV Rooms and other air-conditioned rooms.
2.3 Consultants shall propose the most energy-efficient air-conditioning system.
2.4 Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRV) air-cooled split units (with 100% standby and automatic changeover) shall be used to serve the LAN and Central Server Rooms only.
2.5 Fresh air supply duct shall be concealed in the ceiling and connected to the fan coil unit where connection port is available in the FCU. For wall mounted FCUs, the fresh air supply duct shall be terminated adjacent to the FCU with a suitable grille.
2.6 Condenser units shall be suitably located on the ground with protection around it and away from vehicular and human traffic and/or on roof level with proper access for maintenance. No condenser units are allowed to be installed on the façade of buildings.
2.7 In all air-conditioned rooms with fan coil units, each unit shall be hard-wired to a central controller located at a suitable location within the room, preferably near the lighting switches.
2.8 A Professional Engineer shall endorse all hangers and anchoring bolts to slabs and roof structure/trusses.
2.9 Toilets shall be provided with central ducted exhaust system with low-level extraction points installed in all WC compartments. Exhaust grilles used for these low level extracts shall have blades with either V or Y profiles.
2.10 Exhaust fans shall be located on the roof. All discharge points of the toilet and kitchen exhaust systems shall be located above the roof level and shall not face any residential blocks.
2.11 The noise level shall not exceed 65dBA when measured at 1m away from the toilet or kitchen exhaust fans.
Air-Conditioning System
Location of CU
Mechanical Ventilation
REV-00 / FEB 06
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 2.2-2
VOL.
4
2.12 Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium. The exhaust hood
and grease filters shall be stainless steel.
2.13 If school blocks are 5 storeys and higher, two 20-person electric traction lifts shall be provided. Lifts shall be provided with automatic rescue devices (ARD) to bring the lifts to the nearest floor and open doors during power failures.
2.14 If a low-rise school is designated as a handicapped school, one 13-person electric traction lift shall be provided. This lift shall comply with the handicap-access requirement.
2.15 Double-leaf doors with sufficiently large glass vision panels shall be provided for all lifts.
2.16 1 no. alarm bell shall be located at the 1st storey lift lobby. Bell should be labeled “Lift Alarm – Inform office or Call for lift service if bell is activated”.
2.17 The intercom in the lift car shall be linked to the General Office and the lift motor room.
2.18 A lift supervisory repeater panel shall be located in the General Office.
Lift Installation
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-1
3.0 Electrical Systems
The following requirements for electrical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications and obtain MOE’s approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not exhaustive. Consultants are advised to check with the MOE officer-in-charge if they require further clarifications.
3.1 Electricity supply (applied load) for a typical primary and secondary school shall be 1000kVA each. The ultimate load for primary school shall be 1250kVA while for secondary school it shall be 1500kVA.
3.2 Main consumer sub-switchboard, distribution boards serving sensitive equipment such as computer equipment, fire alarm, security alarm, etc shall be equipped with lightning surge arrestor.
3.3 Canteen stalls shall be provided with a Centralised Consumer Metering Panel to house the stalls’ electrical meters. This shall be provided in a closet within the canteen.
3.4 Cabling standards must meet the following minimum requirements: -
Main Distribution - PVC/SWA/PVC cables in trench/HD UPVC Pipes
Distribution - PVC/PVC cables in metal ladders/trays or PVC cables in metal trunking
Final Sub-Circuits - PVC cables in concealed GI conduits for all areas
All Specialist System - Approved cables in concealed GI conduits
3.5 All single-phase final distribution board shall be metal-clad complete with outgoing single pole MCBs, incoming D/P MCB and RCCB.
3.6 All three-phase final distribution board shall be metal clad complete with single pole MCBs and triple pole MCBs with appropriate rupturing capacities ratings.
LT Works
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-2
3.7 All circuits serving computer loads shall be dedicated. Every outgoing circuit shall be equipped with RCCB and designed to connect to a maximum of 3 twin-gang IT power outlet.
3.8 Computer rooms and IT Resource rooms shall be equipped with a master on-off switch to control all the power points. Such a master switch shall be located next to the lighting switches. Master switches shall be appropriately identified to prevent accidental operation.
3.9 The electrical points shall be properly located in co-ordination with equipment and furniture layouts. This is to ensure easy access to the points during use and maintenance of equipment.
3.10 Lighting level in all rooms meant for teaching, working and reading purposes shall be designed to an average illuminance of 500 lux with a uniformity factor (min/ave) of 0.7. The colour temperature shall be 4000k with colour index of 85.
3.11 Lighting controls shall be in rows and parallel to the whiteboard. A light switch shall be provided for each row of light fittings.
3.12 Light fitting at whiteboard shall be an asymmetrical type with correct orientation to direct light beam onto the whiteboard. The average vertical illuminance shall be 300 lux. Site measurements shall be carried out at night based on 3 x 3 grids.
3.13 Non-dimmable high–frequency electronic ballast shall be used in all fluorescent light fittings within teaching areas/facilities and offices.
3.14 Reflectors to be matt type. The louvers attachment shall give 100% iridescence –free reflection.
3.15 Ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the lightings and no flickering shadows of the rotating fans are cast on the working plane.
3.16 Unless otherwise specified, lighting in rooms/areas for general usage shall be designed to 300 lux.
Lighting / Vision Care
Electrical Points
VOL.
4
Lighting / Vision Care
-Whiteboard
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-3
3.17 Lux level for corridor shall be 50 Lux while that for main school lobby/main foyer/entrance shall be 100 Lux.
3.18 The switch control in the Multi Purpose Hall shall be designed to flexibly control the lighting levels i.e. 500 lux for examination purposes and 300 lux for badminton games (recommended) using row switching.
3.19 The high bay lightings shall be controlled row by row where each row is arranged parallel with the badminton court layout. During a badminton game, lights directly above the court shall be switched ‘off’ to avoid glare.
3.20 There shall be two-way switches for high bay lightings. The switches shall be at the control room and the stage area.
3.21 Parade square shall be provided with 4 nos. of 400W floodlight. Switches controlling the floodlights shall be located at a safe and convenient location.
3.22 Timers shall be used for perimeter lights, security lights and first storey corridor lights.
3.23 The Stage Lighting system shall comprise (but not limited to) a dimmer rack, 24-channel manual and memory control desk, lighting bars and beam arms, 8 units of 1000W beam light, 6 units of 650W variable Fresnel spotlight, 4 units of 650W variable prism convex spotlight, 4 units of 500W-4 compartment cyclorama floodlight, 6 units of 500W-1 compartment cyclorama floodlight and safety chains for the luminaries (certified by PE).
3.24 Consultants shall note that besides the stage lighting system, general lightings and ceiling fans shall be provided at the stage area.
3.25 Ceiling fan shall come complete with proprietary-made stainless aircraft cables. The ceiling fan rods shall have batch-tested labels from locally approved authorities.
3.26 All wall and ceiling fans shall be certified by locally approved authorities. In addition, a durable sticker indicating the month and year of installation shall be provided on each fan.
Lighting / Vision Care
-Multi-Purpose Hall
Stage Lighting System
VOL.
4
Electrical Fan
REV-01 / MAY 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING
3.27 Ceiling fans shall have 1.5m sweep controlled with speed regulators.
3.28 Heavy-duty (min. 500mm diameter) wall fan with low noise level (max 60dBA when measured 1m away from fan) shall be provided for the Multi-Purpose Hall. The cage and blades shall not rust easily.
3.29 The Structured Cabling System shall be designed to MOE IT Branch’s latest version of ‘MOE Infrastructure Requirements for School’.
3.30 All cables within rooms/facilities shall run in Heavy-Duty PVC skirting-trunkings.
3.31 All trunking and conduits passing through/terminating in the LAN and Central Server Rooms shall be properly sealed internally and externally to protect from condensation in these rooms.
3.32 Two-compartment underfloor GI trunking shall be provided for computer rooms and IT Learning Resource Room.
3.33 A clean earth shall be provided for computer network.
3.34 ‘Computer Point’ label shall be engraved on the IT socket outlets.
3.35 Where applicable, one LAN point with a twin-gang power point shall be provided on either side of a whiteboard. (One point for teacher and one point for printer.)
3.36 Consultant shall ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the projection of the image of the LCD projector. Refer to Diagram 3-A. Refer to diagrams 3-B, 3-C and 3-D for LCD support bracket details and setback distances.
3.37 Cable ready MATV system shall be provided. It shall be designed and installed so as to facilitate future cable TV connection.
3.38 Certificate of Cable Readiness shall be obtained from IDA’s approved cable operator.
3.39 The internal telephone distribution network complete with wirings shall be in concealed GI conduits.
LAN Points
Display –LCD Projector
VOL.
4
Structured Cabling System
Cable Ready Master Antenna
Television (MATV) System
Telephones
Trunking & Conduit
2.3- 4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-5
3.40 Public Address System (PA) shall be a stand alone system. The design shall take into consideration the clarity of speech, ease of maintenance as well as future expansion.
3.41 PA system provision shall be at the following places:
• Canteen
• Multi-Purpose Hall
• Parade Square
• School Field
• Each level of each building block (grouped as one zone)
3.42 The system shall comprise (but not be limited to) a power amplifier, PA call station console, ceiling recessed speakers, box speakers, horn speakers, column speakers, condenser microphones, cardiod microphones, microphone stands (table stand type and floor stand type c/w boom arm), microphones receptacles, DVD player, master station, video display unit, PA intercom set, battery backup, equipment rack and cabinets.
3.43 The system shall be supplied with the following equipment:
• 4 units dynamic cardiod microphones
• 2 units table microphones stands
• 2 units telescopic floor microphone stand c/w boom arm
• 1 unit gooseneck microphone stand c/w clip on adapter and table flange for mounting onto lectern.
• 1 unit wireless clip-on microphone system.
3.44 The Professional Sound Reinforcement System for each Audio Visual Room shall comprise (but not limited to) an 8-channel integrated mixers, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player, speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack.
3.45 The Professional Sound System within the Multi Purpose Hall (MPH) shall comprise (but not limited to) a 16-channel mixing console, equaliser, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player, speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack located at the control room.
Public Address System (PA)
Sound Reinforcement
System
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-6
3.46 A lockable tabletop cabinet complete with drawers shall be provided. The tabletop space shall be sufficient to cater for the placement of stage lighting dimmer control desk and sound reinforcement system control desk.
3.47 The system shall be designed and commissioned by a sound specialist. The design shall be capable of providing uniform coverage throughout the entire area or room where it is installed. The system shall provide high quality sound reinforcement for specific programs such as speeches, talks, debates, dramas and concerts.
3.48 The Electronic Security Alarm System shall comprise dual-tech motion detectors, magnetic door contacts, siren & strobe lights, panic button (in Principal’s Room) and key holding service.
3.49 Each room under surveillance shall be designed/programmed as one zone.
3.50 For the Armoury (in SS only), consultants shall liase with relevant authorities to inspect and approve the security alarm system.
3.51 A dedicated lease line shall be provided and connected to an alarm monitoring company for the key holding services.
3.52 Fire Alarm System shall be a stand-alone manual system. All areas along escape route shall be provided with manual alarm call points and sounders. Additional sounders shall be provided in all acoustic-treated rooms such as the Audio Visual Rooms and the Music Rooms.
3.53 Smoke detectors shall be installed in LAN and Central Server rooms.
3.54 The tone of the school bell shall be distinct from the fire alarm bell to allow for immediate recognition by occupants.
3.55 One unit of clock and bell timer shall be installed in the General Office. The clock chime system shall be capable of interfacing with the PA System.
3.56 Terminal devices that allow high-speed signal transmission shall be used when link-ups from equipment to the PLC exceed 10m.
Electronic Security Alarm System
Fire Alarm System
VOL.
4
REV-01 / MAY 06
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
3.57 The central monitoring shall be in the form of LED mimic display panel located in the General Office.
3.58 The following points shall be monitored/controlled by alarms:
Equipment Run/ Start
Control
Run/ Start
Status
Fault Trip
Alarm
Power Supply Status
Low Water Level Alarm
High Water Alarm Level
High Temp. Status
Booster Pump X X X X
Hosereel Pump X X X X
Water Tank X X
Exhaust Fan X X X X
Kitchen Exhaust Fan
X X X X
VRV air Conditioner
X X X X
Air-Cooled Package Unit
X X X X
3.59 Equipotential netting shall be provided at the parade square and outdoor courts.
3.60 The internal dimensions of the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) shall be 1.0m x 1.5m. The height of the room door shall be 2.1m.
2 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for the room.
3.61 The internal dimensions of the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) shall be 2.0m x 2.0m. 4 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for TER.
3.62 A Design & Technology (D & T) Switch Room is required to cater for the 3-phase electrical supply to Design & Technology areas. Its room area shall be 16 m2. The clear height of the room shall be min. 3.6m.
3.63 The D & T Switch Room shall be located near the D & T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop and Design Room. The door of the room shall open into a corridor.
Lightning Protection System
Services & Switch Rooms
VOL.
4 2.3- 7
REV-01 / MAY 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING
3.64 Maximum width shall be given for the door opening and proper drainage shall be provided for the service trench in the D & T Switch Room. A fire extinguisher and a single gang power point shall also be provided. The lighting level in the room shall be 300 lux.
3.65 The lead-in pipes provision is as shown in Diagram 3-E.
3.66 CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (CSRS) shall be provided at all schools. The requirements for the above system shall be fully complied with. For cases of non-compliance, consultants are required to submit justifications for MOE (SEMPO) ’s approval.
3.67 The provision of CSRS includes the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of a set of cameras, CCTV surveillance, recording system, hardware and software. The Specifications for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System is at Appendix 1 of Vol. 4.
Diagram 3-A
SAMPLE OF CEILING DIAGRAM
CCTV Surveillance & Recording
System
VOL.
4 2.3-8
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-9
Diagram 3-B
SETBACK DISTANCE AND POSITION OF PROJECTOR
Diagram 3-C
ENLARGED DRAWING OF SECURITY BOLT
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-10
Diagram 3-D
LCD SUPPORT BRACKET
VOL.
4
REV-01 / MAY 06
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Diagram 3-E
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF SERVICE TRENCH LAYOUT
SECTION OF LEAD-IN PIPE TRENCH FOR D&T SWITCH ROOM
2.3- 11
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
ELECTRICALENGINEERING 2.3-12
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY AND SECURITY
3.68 All air-conditioning condenser units or other services shall be enclosed to prevent unauthorized tampering.
Air-Conditioning
3.69 Light fittings are to be independently supported by approved means and structural PE’s certification for multi-purpose hall light fitting installation must be obtained.
Light Fitting Installation
3.70 The following fan installation requirements are to be followed:
Fan spacing is recommended to be at 3m apart.
• The fan blade must be a minimum of 2.5m above FFL with 250mm minimum clearance between ceiling and fan blades.
• Fan rods are to withstand 10 times the deadweight of the fan.
• Stainless steel wire with safety factor of at least 20 times the static load of the fan to serve as backup support for the fan in the event that the support fails due to wear and tear.
• Fan bolts, nuts, washer must be tightened with torque wrench.
• Consultant must ensure 100% inspection of all fans.
Fans Installation
3.71 All M & E panels and provisions (such as rising, fire panels, dry riser) are not to protrude into the corridor or other work spaces as they could pose as safety hazards. Such provisions shall be recessed.
Services to be well-contained
VOL.
4
REV-00 / FEB 06
PLUMBINGENGINEERING 2.4-1
4.0 Plumbing
4.1 The water supply system shall be an indirect feed system with a single tank, dual pump-set and a main distribution header serving two (2) droppers (potable & flush water) for every toilet shaft. A plinth provision for future toilet flushing water storage tank shall be provided nearby.
4.2 The material of the water tank shall be Glass-Reinforced Plastic (GRP).
4.3 Isolation valve shall be provided at every main and branch distribution pipes. Mini isolation valve shall be provided for each appliance / fixture.
4.4 Sub-meter shall be provided at each canteen stall. From each meter, a separate pipe shall be drawn to the central wash area trough and terminated with a lockable tap.
4.5 Electric Hot Water Storage System shall be used for the Kitchen (Home Economics).
4.6 The hot water supply temperature shall not be less than 500C.
4.7 Grease trap shall be positioned close to the driveway for ease of maintenance and connection to disposal vehicle/truck.
4.8 Floor trap gratings shall be made of stainless steel.
4.9 Tank room is not required to house the hosereel tank if it is located on the roof. Trellis or otherwise shall be provided to shield the hosereel tank from view.
4.10 No pipe work of any kind shall pass through LAN and Central Server Rooms.
4.11 Underground concrete storage water tank shall be provided if a fire hydrant pumping system is required for the school development.
Water Supply
Hot Water System
VOL.
4
Waste and Sanitary System
Fire Hydrant System & Dry Riser System
Hosereel System
REV-00 / FEB 06
PLUMBING ENGINEERING 2.4-2
4.12 Diesel driven pumps shall not be used for the pumping system.
4.13 Pillar hydrant shall not be installed in the vicinity of the parade square, outdoor courts and fitness area. If unavoidable, underground hydrant with proper drainage shall be installed.
4.14 Breeching inlets, landing valves, hosereel, pipe or fitting shall not protrude into the clear pathway of corridors, staircase or other space that will obstruct the smooth passageway of occupants.
4.15 Town gas shall be used.
4.16 Water mains, sanitary drain-lines and hydrant pipes shall not be laid under parade square, school field, outdoor courts and fitness area.
Gas System
VOL.
4
3 Other Provisions
3.1
Design Exclusions
3.2 External Work
3.3
Upgrading Works
3.4 Project Signboard
3.5
Hoarding Design
DESIGN EXCLUSIONSVOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.1-1
1.0 Design Exclusions
The following items are some standard statutory requirements that may not be applicable or relevant to MOE schools. Consultants shall evaluate the applicability and relevance of each item in the list and apply for necessary waivers from the respective statutory authorities.
1.1 BCA regulation states that provision for the physically handicapped are required for every area accessible to students.
This applies only to MOE schools that are within the 10% stock of schools designated with full-handicap facilities.
For all other schools, only basic-handicap provisions are to be catered for, i.e, barrier-free accessibility is required only at 1st storey at the Administration area, Canteen and at least one of the classrooms blocks. In addition, one ambulant-disabled toilet is to be provided at one toilet cluster at every level only.
1.2 BCA regulation states that no part of the room (other than a room in a warehouse) served by windows or openings shall be more than 12m away horizontally from the windows and openings.
MOE schools’ Canteen and Hall block are granted waiver to exceed the stipulated width. Generous openings are provided at two sides of the Canteen and Hall. The Canteen and Hall are also installed with ceiling fans to improve air circulation. Furthermore, the Canteen is only used for about half an hour by students during recess time.
1.3 BCA regulation states that the windows and openings for natural ventilation shall be so located that they face and open upon (i) the sky (ii) a street, service road or other public space (iii) an open-yard or open space located on the building lot (iv) an air-well.
MOE schools have rooms at the Canteen block e.g. CCA rooms, Bookshop that do not open directly to the external, but are provided with louvred windows and doors. The doors and windows have to be located within a distance limit acceptable to BCA, to the nearest external space.
Handicap Provisions
Hall and Canteen widths
Location of Windows and Openings for
Material
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.1-2
1.4 BCA regulation states that every room in any building shall be provided with natural light and ventilation by means of one or more windows or openings having an aggregate area of not less than 10% of the floor space of the room and if the aggregate area is more than 10% of the floor space, at least 10% of the floor space shall be openable.
The BCA regulation cannot be complied with as stores in the school need to be compartmentalized due to Fire Code. These rooms are non-habitable.
1.5 URA regulation states that walls or fences which are constructed of chain-link fencing, railings, grilles, or any like material which allows the passage of light and air may be constructed up to a maximum height of 3000mm.
MOE schools are allowed to provide a 4600mm high fencing along the edge of the football field to prevent high balls from flying out of the school compounds for safety reasons.
1.6 FSSD states that where a kitchen is required for the preparation of food, and, where ‘open flame’ cooking appliances are used, the kitchen shall be separated from other parts of the same building by compartment wall and floor having fire resistance of at least one hour.
Separation requirement for kitchen could be exempted in MOE schools where there would be at least 25% of the perimeter walls of the canteen opening directly onto the external and the floor space is within 9 meter from the nearest opening.
1.7 FSSD requires fireman access panels (FAP) to be provided to every floor.
MOE schools will have unobstructed circulation corridors instead of FAP.
1.8 FSSD regulation requires the dry rising main to be installed in buildings under purpose group III where habitable height is more than 10m, but does not exceed 60m.
MOE projects consist of mainly upgrading of existing blocks. Addition of dry riser and breeching inlets to the existing blocks will require major changes to the structure design. Some projects are exempted from the requirements.
Area of Window Openings for
Natural Ventilation
Height of Walls and Fences
Separation requirement for
kitchen
Fireman access
Dry Rising Main
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN EXCLUSIONSVOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.1-3
1.9 FSSD regulation requires that the number and distribution of rising mains to all parts of any floor more than 10m and not exceeding 24m above the ground level is within 38m from a landing valve.
MOE schools are allowed to go beyond 38m, provided there are 2 nos. standby hose within the coverage.
1.10 FSSD regulation requires that decking of the raised floor shall be constructed of non-combustible material or where combustible material is used as core material, if allowed in the case of sprinkler protected buildings, the top, bottom, all sides and cut edges shall be covered with material with surface properly complying with Class O (excluding materials for floor finishes)
Timber flooring is allowed in the school hall as part of MOE’s requirement. The height of the concealed space measured between top of the structural floor and underside of the raised timber floor decking is usually not more than 55mm high. The school hall also has 2 hose reels and 6 fire extinguishers provided to address this regulation.
1.11 National Parks Board (NPB) requires that the fire engine accessway and access road shall not encroach into green buffers, peripheral plantings verges and planting verges within car parking areas.
In schools undergoing upgrading, due to tight site configuration, some building blocks cannot be shifted to achieve the required width of planting verge. Hence, encroachment by the fire engine access into the green areas is allowed but the green area must be compensated by grass-cell pavers to provide greenery.
1.12 NPB requires provision of a 2m wide planting verge on at least one side of the proposed internal driveway.
In schools where there is space constraint, a minimum 0.5m wide planting box is provided on one side of the internal driveway.
1.13 NPB requires provision of a minimum 2m soil depth for tree planting.
Where the fire engine access is built beneath a building structure which is near to the tree planting strip, only a 1.5m soil depth for tree planting is provided so that headroom of 4.5m can be achieved for the passing of fire engine and school buses.
Combustible Material
Application
Green Buffers not to be encroached
upon
Planting Verge
Soil Depth
REV-00 / FEB 06
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.1-4
1.14 IDA requires that the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) size to be 2.2m x 2m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the CDR size to be reduced to 1m x 0.5m (internal dimensions) but the door height shall be 2.1m
1.15 IDA requires that the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) size to be 3.0m x 2.5m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the TER size be reduced to 2.0m x 2.0m (internal dimensions)
CDR
TER
REV-00 / FEB 06
REV-00 / FEB 06
EXTERNAL WORKSVOL.
4 3.2-1 OTHERS PROVISIONS
2.0 Landscaping
2.1 Basic turfing, trees and shrubs are to be provided to green plots and perimeters around the school.
2.2 The selection of plants is to be conducted in consultation with National Parks Board to ensure appropriate provisions for the plants are planned for. Landscaping features and structures are to be designed in consultation with the school and MOE.
2.3 The following are some pointers which need to be addressed in providing for landscaping in schools:
Careful attention to spatial design, roof form, building coverage and shadow line to ensure the green areas can thrive without mechanical support (sprinklers etc).
Careful selection of building material to support plant life.
Ensure safety in the design of softscaping and hardscaping to minimise risks to users and persons involved in maintaining them (especially of hanging planters, trellises and eco ponds (if any).
Proper waterproofing, drainage, down pipes or sub-soil layers for landscaping above ground to be provided for.
Ensure rainwater down pipes or drains are not choked by fallen leaves due to the location of trees or plants.
Minimise any event of soil spillage along corridors especially during wet weather.
2.4 Ensure planting does not cause nuisance or hazards by the type of plant proposed. The characteristics of trees and shrubs that are preferred but not limited to, are as listed below:
• fast growing and shady.
• shed very few leaves and are green all year round.
Turfing
Design considerations
Flora selection considerations
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
EXTERNAL WORKS 3.2-2
• have ground roots that are less extensive so as to avoid damage to ground features and underground services.
• bear little or no fruits as these may attract insects and birds, and spoils may present a hygiene and maintenance problem.
• flowering shrubs that do not attract insects which may pose harm to students.
REV-00 / FEB 06
UPGRADING WORKS
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.3-1
EXCLUSIONS
3.0 Scope of Upgrading Works for schools undergoing PRIME
3.1 The objective of upgrading is to ensure that school facilities provision meets the latest standards and specifications of MOE in terms of curricular, co-curricular and operational needs. The upgrading works may involve the following:
Increase in general Nett Floor Area (NFA)
Increase in no. of classrooms
Increase in classroom size
Addition of new building facilities
Enlargement of facilities
Addition or extension of new support facilities
Refurbishment to the latest standard of finishes
Improvement works to external facilities
3.2 The upgrading works have also to meet the latest planning requirements stipulated by MOE and the statutory authorities. Some of the works involved include:
Orientation of classrooms
Provision of fire engine access
Planning setbacks
Use of water-saving cisterns in toilets/ sensor-operated flush valves for urinals and water closets in toilet cubicle for ambulant disabled and wheelchair users.
Upgrading of M&E services, e.g new substation and switchroom, cabling and electrical fixtures, air-conditioning, water reticulation system and gas piping installation.
Upgrading of civil works e.g underground services and retaining walls.
Scope of Upgrading to
fulfil latest MOE specifications
Upgrading works to meet latest
statutory requirements
REV-01 / MAY 06
UPGRADING WORKSEXCLUSIONS
VOL.
4 OTHER PROVISIONS 3.3-2
3.3 The design approaches for each school may vary. Consultants are required to carry out analysis of the needs and requirements of the school and recommend suitable solutions for the school. Consultants shall identify and keep MOE informed of any shortcomings of the proposals or solutions.
3.4 The alternatives to upgrading on site include:
To move the existing school out to a holding school and rebuild a new school on site
To move the existing school out to a holding school while upgrading the existing premises
3.5 In the case of upgrading a school with the occupants still operating on site, the two salient criteria are:
To ensure safety of the students
To minimise disruption to the operations and normal functioning of the school
3.6 In order to ensure safety of students during the upgrading process, the site planning has to take into consideration the following requirements:
A separate access to the site for construction vehicles is available
A clear separation of construction area from the operational side of the school (for schools with no alternative access for construction vehicles, it is recommended that the school moves out to holding premises)
Ensure that school’s security, safety and public relations strategies and measures are understood and complied with
Design approach
Important Criteria for upgrading a school on site
Safety Criteria
REV-00 / FEB 06
UPGRADING WORKS
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS 3.3-3
EXCLUSIONS
3.6 In order to minimise disruption to normal class activities, the main approach is to minimise structural changes to the existing blocks.
The works to existing teaching blocks should be limited to internal A & A works, which can be carried out during the school holidays. If there are major shortfalls in area, a new block could be constructed on a vacant area of the site.
Whenever extensions to existing structures are required, e.g. extension to the hall and canteen, new load-bearing structures are to be proposed independent of the existing structures.
Where space permits, a temporary hall/canteen structure is to be provided as a sheltered assembly area during the upgrading/ extension of the old hall/canteen.
The construction system to be used would need to be considered very carefully. Bore piling is to be proposed for the foundation of the new blocks, as opposed to driven piles. In addition, micro-piling system is to be proposed for any extension to existing blocks in view of the limited access and working area near the existing structures. There should be temporary facilities provided in place of the affected facilities.
3.7 Consultants are advised to carry out their own detailed study and analyses of the site and building works and recommend suitable solutions for the school and MOE for approval prior to commencement of works. The Consultants shall highlight and keep MOE informed of the shortcomings of their proposed solutions.
Minimizing Disruption
Proposed plans for upgrading
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
PROJECT SIGNBOARD3.4-1
4.0 The following are samples of project signboard design for MOE’s school development projects.
Diagram 4-A
SAMPLE ELEVATION
Diagram 4-B
SIGNBOARD PART DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
PROJECT SIGNBOARD 3.4-2
Diagram 4-C
SAMPLE FRAME DETAIL
Diagram 4-D
SAMPLE SECTION A-A
REV-00 / FEB 06
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
HOARDING DESIGN3.5-1
5.0 Hoarding Design for Schools undergoing PRIME 5.0 The hoarding and project signboards to be used for the upgrading works
are as shown in Diagrams 5-A to 5-I.
Diagram 5-A
SAFETY SIGNAGE FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS
Diagram 5-B
HOARDING FOR PRIME PROJECTS
DETAIL
• Signboard to be used (as internal facing)
only where construction works are
taking place adjacent to existing
operating school premises
• To be aluminum silkscreen / painted
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
HOARDING DESIGN 3.5-2
EXPLANATION FOR GRAPHICS:
The design is represented by a pair of hands holding a book with a page about to be turned over revealing a new
chapter. The composition symbolizes the delivery of the education for a new millennium where there will be an
extensive use of its technology. The swirl is the symbol for the new millennium and the circuitry denotes technology.
The colours of the MOE’s crest are adopted for the graphics.
NOTES
• The colours will be to SO’s approval
• For project rebuilding works,
replace “Upgrading Works” to
“Rebuilding Works”
• Contractor to verify all dimensions
on site before fabrication
O-Orange (BS 06E51)
G-Grey (BS 00A05)
R-Red (BS 04E53)
B-Blue (BS 020D45)
W-White (BS 00E55)
BK-Black
Diagram 5-C
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
4 OTHERS PROVISIONS
HOARDING DESIGN3.5-3
Diagram 5-D
LEGEND
O-Orange (BS 08E51)
* The colours shall be
to SO’s Approval
R-Red (BS 04E53)
B-Blue (BS 020D45)
W-White (BS 00E55)
G-Grey (BS 00A05)
COLOUR DIAGRAM
Diagram 5-E
HOARDING DESIGN FOR NEW WORKS
4 Appendices
4.1
Specifications for CCTV System
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 1 of 11
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, DELIVERY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF A CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS TO THE SCHOOLS This compliance checklist sets forth the detailed specifications. The explanation to the Code is as follows:
Code Explanation
M Mandatory The vendor is to meet the necessary mandatory.
P Primary Requirement The primary requirements refer to the most important specifications. The vendor is to meet the primary requirements or propose substitutes to the primary requirements.
O Optional Requirement The optional requirements refer to what is preferable and desirable to have.
I Information
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 2 of 11
1. INTRODUCTION
Description Code Remarks
1.1 Background 1.1.1 Ministry of Education (MOE) is sourcing for a CCTV
Surveillance and Recording System including cameras for educational institutes with the option to connect to the school local network.
I School has the option to decide.
1.1.2 A newly setup of CCTV System comprises 12 cameras for Primary & Secondary and 16 cameras for Junior College. I
1.2 Scope 1.2.1 The vendor must supply, deliver, install, test and
commission the CCTV surveillance and recording system with the necessary hardware, software, training and documentation as specified in this document. The vendor is responsible for ensuring that a complete working system is provided.
M
1.2.2 The work scope must include a professional site survey and advise to the school on the suitability of camera locations and any additional technical requirements. The professional site survey with recommendation on the operation siting of camera location, the type of lens to be used and any technical requirements are to be documented. One copy is to be forwarded to the school for verification and endorsement before any work is carried out.
M
1.2.3 The work scope must also include the cabling job, like proper termination of DC/AC and Coaxial Cable connections and supply of any other equipment for the complete system as stated in this specification.
M
1.2.4 The work scope must include follow-up on fine tuning of the camera positions, focusing, reviewing images and recording settings; and any technical adjustment to the hardware and software within 30 days of installation.
M
1.2.5 The vendor must be responsible for the rectification of all defects within a twelve (12)-month Warranty Period of the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed at no extra cost to the contract. During the warranty period, the vendor should be responsible for all cost incurred in repairing and replacement of the faulty equipment. The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed during the Warranty Period is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11.
M
1.2.6 The vendor is to quote, as an option, for schools to enter into 2 years comprehensive maintenance agreement upon expiry of the warranty period with the option to renew for another 2 years up to a total of 6 years.
Vendor should provide the work scope of a maintenance agreement in the submission of the quotation.
The scope of the warranty and maintenance agreement should include but not limited to the following:- - Repairs and replacement of faulty components - Quarterly servicing, specialised cleaning on sensitive
components and testing
O
Vendor to submit the quotation as optional item.
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 3 of 11
Description Code Remarks
- Attendance to breakdown, power failure and other contingencies when the system is not fully functioning. This includes inspections and investigation on causes of system mal-function and prompt rectification.
- Provides quarterly updates with the latest Anti-virus Signature files and Operating System patches.
- If the system is connected to the school LAN, the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available)
- Vendor is to provide the renewal of security software license installed in the system.
- The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras for the maintenance contract is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11.
1.2.7 The specification is given as a performance related specification for the system and equipment. It is the responsibility of the vendors tendering to select the most appropriate equipment to fulfil the objectives and requirements of the system. Part of the tender evaluation process will to access the quality, reliability, and suitability of the equipment proposed.
M
1.3 General Requirements
Description Code Remarks
1.3.1 The proposed system is to be easily scale for future expansion and needs of the education institutes.
M
1.3.2 All proposed hardware and software must include features to integrate fully with existing computing resources, namely the school Local Area Network.
M
1.3.3 All hardware and software being proposed is to be fully compatible and interoperable. With the option to connect to the school local network. The system must be compatible to the school computer which is installed with Microsoft Operating System.
M
1.3.4 The proposed system should be compliant with all MOE policies, including but not limited to the MOE security standards.
M
1.3.5 The proposed system is to be compatible and interchangeable with any types or brands of industry standard cameras.
M
1.3.6 The proposed system is to operate on a 230-volt, single phase, 50 Hz input electric power supply.
M
1.3.7 The proposed system should include features of lightning protection for components exposed to such risks.
M
1.3.8 The vendor is to submit as part of the proposal, the detailed technical specifications of all equipment and schematic diagrams of the equipment showing their interfaces with each other, if any. Includes all product brochures, catalogues, detail and updated documentation.
M
1.3.9 The vendor is to provide up two centralised training sessions for up to 30 participants per session.
M
1.3.10 The connection from the video cameras to the CCTV
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 4 of 11
Description Code Remarks
network should be made by secured means/medium so to prevent eavesdrop and hacking to the system. The vendor should include detailed technical specifications of the secured means/medium as part of the proposal.
M
1.3.11 The vendor should include an option to provide 15 minutes Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) to the system. In the event of prolong power failure, the UPS should send shut down signal to the critical system (that cannot withstand power shutdown) for a graceful shutdown sequence.
P
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 5 of 11
2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS
Description Code Remarks
2.1 General 2.1.1 The CCTV Surveillance and Recording System shall be likely
to install in the school’s General Office (the actual location shall be determined by the school).
I
2.2 Operating Environment 2.2.1 The proposed system must include features to integrate with
the existing school network infrastructure. M
2.2.2 All software for the management of the proposed system must include features to support remote management from a client workstation locally.
M
2.2.3 The operating system must be embedded Microsoft or Linux. If the proposed system uses any other proprietary OS, vendor is to specify the detail including the country of origin. The vendor should provide all software licences that are deployed for the system to operate.
M
2.3 Physical Housing 2.3.1 The proposed system is to have all vital recording
components and features condensed into a single box unit for ease of use and administration.
M
2.3.2 The proposed housing must be of industrial grade that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours, 7 days week. Stable temperature under non-air conditioned environment with high performance ventilation system. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF)
M
2.3.3 The proposed system is to have option for non rack mountable or rack mountable to conserve space and easily integrate into existing server rack.
P
2.3.4 The proposed system is to have at least 2 types of hardware locks, like keyboard lock, security key. P
2.4 CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (Hardware and Software) 2.4.1 The vendor is to state the type of system proposed for CCTV
Surveillance and Recording System including the detail of the hardware and software.
M
2.4.2 The proposed system is designed such that minimum knowledge on the use of personal computer system is required for daily operation.
M
2.4.3 The proposed system is installed with at least an Intel Pentium 4, 2.6 GHz, HT Technology, 1024 MB RAM or equivalent.
M
2.4.4 The vendor is to recommend the video compression technique basing on the frame per second stated in paragraph 2.4.7 and must be open IEEE standard.
M
2.4.5 The proposed system support PAL/NTSC signal. M 2.4.6 The proposed system is able to support up to 16 cameras. M
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 6 of 11
Description Code Remarks
2.4.7 The proposed system is able to store up to 3 weeks of recording at least 8 fps and at resolution of 640 x 480 for all 16 cameras in a continuous recording mode. The HDD must be hot swappable and with a 20% buffer capacity.
M
2.4.8 The proposed system is allow Video Triplex Multiplexing (Record, Playback and Archive) simultaneously M
2.4.9 The proposed system is to have Watermarking feature for video authentication. M
2.4.10 The proposed system is able to support Watch Dog function. M 2.4.11 The proposed system is to have motion detection or event
recording with zone masking and sensitivity configuration features for individual camera.
M
2.4.12 The proposed system is able to support Time & Date Stamping on Video recording. M
2.4.13 The proposed system is to have image enhancement feature for individual camera for display and recorded images. M
2.4.14 The proposed system is to have image digital zoom capability.
M
2.4.15 The proposed system is able to support scheduling for individual camera recording profile.
M
2.4.16 The proposed system is to allow digital search of all video-recordings of cameras based on times and dates stamp.
M
2.4.17 The proposed system allows playbacks and be able to be exported out into both picture and video format (AVI, JPEG or Bitmap).
M
2.4.18 The proposed system must include features to allow user to access with web browser or any client software up to 3 LAN user computer systems within the school.
M
2.4.19 The proposed system must include features to provide network support (100 BaseT).
M
2.4.20 The proposed system must include features for alarm, MMS, SMS or telephone call notification alert upon event triggering.
M
2.4.21 The proposed system is able to output images to TV. M 2.4.22 The proposed system is to have the option for backup of the
recording if the primary HDD failed. Vendor is to provide detail on the types of backup system. The storage device must be hot swappable.
M
2.4.23 The proposed system is to include 1 x 17” LCD monitor or equivalent, keyboard and mouse and/or remote control that allow user to select the viewing of the camera image, configuration / setting of the DVR, exporting images, etc.
p
2.4.24 The proposed system is to consist at least have full screen, 2-split, 4-split, 8-split, 10-split, and 16-split screen displays of video from the cameras. State otherwise if it is different.
P
2.4.25 The proposed system is able to support 4 video outputs (1 x S-Video, 1xVGA, 1xBNC Monitor and 1xTV Monitor). State otherwise if it is different.
P
2.4.26 The proposed system is to have the rotation (Auto-Selector) screen feature. P
2.4.27 The proposed systems is able to supports a minimum display resolution of 640 X 480 for up to 16 cameras P
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 7 of 11
Description Code Remarks
2.4.28 The proposed system is able to support different setting in recording rate/speed for different cameras. P
2.4.29 The proposed system is able to support output video or images in AVI, JPEG or Bitmap. P
2.4.30 The proposed system is to have at least 6 multi-users access levels with password access, security rights for different class of users, etc. Vendor is to provide detail on the multi-users setting.
P
2.4.31 The proposed system provides video editing facility to allow exporting of certain desired portion of the video-recordings onto DVD/RW (to be provided with the system) or external storage device using USB. The man machine interface of the video editing software shall be user friendly for the user to operate on.
P
2.4.32 The proposed system is able to support retrieving playback concurrently during recording locally within the designated displays for monitoring.
P
2.4.33 The proposed system is to have the advanced object feature that allows user to search the movement of object in the particular area selected on the date/time selected.
P
2.4.34 The proposed system is able to support control and interface with up to 2 x Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras.
P
2.4.35 The components for the proposed system must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours recording, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF)
M
2.5 Optional Installation 2.5.1 The vendor is to provide quotation as optional items stated in
paragraph 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 for the school to install the additional features. The quotation for the optional items valid for 2 years upon contract awarding.
I
2.5.2 Connection to School LAN – The vendor provide the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected to the school LAN. The option to connect to the school LAN includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary. All personal computers or servers connected to the School LAN have to be installed with Anti-virus software and the latest Operating system patches. When connected to the School LAN, the system will have to comply with all existing MOE security policies e.g. the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available). If the system should be connected to the school LAN and wireless is proposed, the vendor must comply with all existing MOE security policies including providing a firewall, VPN and any other hardware/software necessary to secure the system from security breaches.
O
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 8 of 11
Description Code Remarks
2.5.3 Notification Alert Upon Event Triggering – The vendor provides the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected for the notification alert upon event triggering. The option to connection includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary for the following:
a. SMS (MMS) alert notification. b. External device alarm (siren, burglar alarm or strobe
light). c. Telephone call alert.
O
2.6 CCTV Colour Dome Camera (Indoor Camera) 2.6.1. Day and night colour camera. M 2.6.2. A minimum horizontal resolution of at least 420 TV lines. M 2.6.3. Image pick-up device of 1/3” Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD
or equivalent.
M
Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD
2.6.4. Lens is to have Electronic Iris. Fixed lens and lens must be of glass material. Vendor is to recommend the best focal lens to be used in order to suit the site environment. M
Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.
2.6.5. White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites M 2.6.6. Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual
overwrites M
2.6.7. Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux colour (F1.2) and 0.03 Lux black and white (F1.2) 10-Bit. M
2.6.8. Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec M 2.6.9. Compatible with various lens types. M 2.6.10. Camera assembly is to be easily installed and removable. M 2.6.11. Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage
including DC12V /AC24V power supply. M
2.6.12. The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting.
M
2.6.13. Maximum Aperture Ratio 1:1.3 ~ 2.0 P 2.6.14. Angle of View H: 74.2 Deg ~ 30 Deg, V:54 Deg ~ 22.4 Deg,
2.6.16. Video Output 1.0V[p-p] PAL Composite, 75 ohm / BNC Connector
P
2.6.17. S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) P 2.6.18. Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C P 2.6.19. Operating Humidity: 30% ~ 90% RH P 2.6.20. Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon
the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System.
M
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 9 of 11
Description Code Remarks
2.6.21. Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF).
M
2.7 CCTV Colour Fixed Camera (Outdoor Camera) 2.7.1 Day and night colour camera. M 2.7.2 A minimum horizontal resolution of 480 TV lines. M 2.7.3 Image pick-up device of 1/3” Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD
or equivalent.
M
Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD
2.7.4 Lens is to have Auto Iris and Vari-focal lens of 6 to 60mm. The lens must be of glass material.
M
Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.
2.7.5 White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites. M 2.7.6 Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual
overwrites. M
2.7.7 Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux Colour (F1.2) and 0.01 Lux Black and White (F1.2) M
2.7.8 Picture Elements: Minimum 542 (H) x 582 (V) / PAL M 2.7.9 Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec M 2.7.10 Compatible with various lens types. M 2.7.11 Camera assembly is easily installed and removable. M 2.7.12 Lens mount to be CS mount or C mount with the supplied
adaptor. M
2.7.13 Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage including DC12V/AC24V power supply. M
2.7.14 The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting.
M
2.7.15 Scanning System 2:1 Interlaced (PAL) 625 Lines / 50 Fields / 25 Frames P
2.7.16 Video Output 1V (p-p) PAL Composite, 75 Ohm / BNC Connector P
2.7.17 S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) P 2.7.18 Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C P 2.7.19 Operating Humidity: Less than 90% RH (No condensation) P 2.7.20 Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon
the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System.
M
2.7.21 Outdoor weather proof housing includes sunshield for all outdoor camera installation. The housing must meet IP66 standard.
M
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 10 of 11
Description Code Remarks
2.7.22 Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF).
M
2.8 Installation 2.8.1 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for indoor
is above false ceilings in PVC conduit pipes whenever possible, otherwise in PVC trunking. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the school’s representative after tender is awarded.
M
2.8.2 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for outdoor is to conceal in water proof PVC conduit pipes. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the school’s representative after tender is awarded.
M
2.8.3 Coaxial Cable of RG59 up to 150m and RG6 > 150m to 400m. Comply to - UL1354 or equivalent (Must submit certificate) Length marking on cable – compulsory. Include BNC connectors on coaxial cable ends.
M
2.8.4 To provide all necessary 13 Amp power points for all cameras and DC adapter. M
2.8.5 When the DC/AC termination is at the camera point, the DC/AC power supply point is to be enclosed in a metal housing to prevent vandalism and turning off the power supply to the camera.
M
2.8.6 To supply and install (including ceiling or wall mounting bracket and cabling) for a 21” Flat Screen CRT TV at the General Office.
M
2.8.7 To supply and install (including video and power supply cabling) for a 17” CCTV monitor at the Security Guard location (exact location is to be determined by the school).
M
2.8.8 The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of surge protection device for the appropriate outdoor camera for protection of high voltage surges from nearby lightning strike.
M Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Surge Protection Device as optional item.
2.8.9 The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of video signal booster for the appropriate outdoor camera.
M Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Video Signal Booster as optional item.
2.8.10 The vendor will be responsible for providing all access equipment necessary to enable safe installation of all high level equipment and cabling.
M
2.8.11 All installations must comply with all relevant statutory requirements, Code of Practices, other current regulations and industrial best practices.
M
Appendix 1
REV-00/FEB 06 Page 11 of 11
RESPONSE AND TURNAROUND TIME
1. System Breakdown Severity S/N SEVERITY DEFINITION
1 Critical Critical defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System critical functionalities or total system failure, and no work around solution exits. This includes the Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 50% and above of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images.
2 Urgent Urgent defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System such that required operational objectives cannot be achieved and work-round solution exists. This includes the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 25% to 49% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images.
3 Normal Normal defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the camera or other external peripherals. This includes 25% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images, and external peripherals like keyboard, mouse, remote control, monitors, etc.
2. Response and Turnaround Time
S/N SEVERITY RESPONSE TIME TURNAROUND TIME 1 Critical Less than Four (4)
working hours after receiving service call
System must be up within 1 working day
2 Urgent Less than Eight (8)
working hours after receiving service call
System must be up within 2 working days
3 Normal Next working day System must be up within 3 working days.
3. Definition
Definition of Working Hoursa.
The “Working Hours” shall be from Monday to Friday (9.00 am to 6.00 pm) excluding Saturday, Sunday and Public Holiday. b. Definition of Response Time The “Response Time” shall be the time between notification of the problem to contractor and the response by the contractor to the site. c. Definition of Turnaround Time The “Turnaround Time” shall be defined as the period of time between the arrival of the contractor’s maintenance staff after notification by the Authority of the defect and the acceptance by the Authority of the restoration of the system operation availability.
Master Revision List
Index
Master Revision List
Design Handbook Vol. 4 – Technical
S/ No.
Page No. Revision No.
Circular No. / Circular Date
Amendment
1. 1.1-4 01 03/2006 (May 06) 1.1-4>Drawing- Inserted setbacks from site boundary
